project specifications restoration monroe park …...a. project identification: monroe park...

PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS

Monroe Park Renovation and RestorationProject No: 09003

Monroe Park Richmond, Virginia 23219

Specifications Monroe Park Renovation and Restoration

December 12, 2016

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARYSECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICESSECTION 012300 - ADDITIVESSECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURESSECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURESSECTION 013280 - LEAD BASED PAINT ABATEMENTS/STABILIZATIONSECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURESSECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTSSECTION 014200 - REFERENCESSECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLSSECTION 015639 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTIONSECTION 017300 - EXECUTIONSECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSALSECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURESSECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATASECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

SECTION 024116 - STRUCTURE DEMOLITIONSECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

SECTION 040120.63 - BRICK MASONRY REPAIRSECTION 040120.64 - BRICK MASONRY REPOINTINGSECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS

SECTION 050170.61 - DECORATIVE METAL REPAIRSECTION 050170.63 - DECORATIVE METAL REFINISHINGSECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

NOT APPLICABLE


December 12, 2016

TABLE OF CONTENTS 2

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 073126 - SLATE ROOFING REPAIRSECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORSSECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

SECTION 096723 - RESINOUS FLOORINGSECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTINGSECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

SECTION 102113.15 - STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

SECTION 129300 - SITE FURNISHINGS

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 131213 - EXTERIOR FOUNTAINS

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

SECTION 221313 - SANITARY SEWERAGESECTION 224713 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

NOT APPLICABLE


December 12, 2016

TABLE OF CONTENTS 3

DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

SECTION 310000 - SITEWORK PROCEDURESSECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING AND DEMOLITIONSECTION 311100 - EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLSECTION 312000 - EARTHWORKSECTION 312100 - WATER DISTRIBUTION

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

SECTION 321313 - CONCRETESECTION 321400 - UNIT PAVINGSECTION 321443 - PERMEABLES UNIT PAVINGSECTION 329200 - LAWNS AND GRASSESSECTION 329300 - PLANTS

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

SECTION 334100 - STORM DRAINAGE

DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 35 - WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTEGRATION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT


December 12, 2016

TABLE OF CONTENTS 4

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 42 - PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 44 - POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 45 - INDUSTRY-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 48 - ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION

NOT APPLICABLE


December 12, 2016

SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.2. Work covered by Contract Documents.3. Phased construction.4. Access to site.5. Work restrictions.6. Specification and drawing conventions.7. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Monroe Park Renovation and Restoration.

1. Project Location: Richmond, VA.

B. Owner: City of Richmond.

C. Owner's Representative:Chris Peluso, CCM, Senior Project ManagerAECOM Design & Consulting ServicesM 415.320.4695900 East Broad St., Rm. 602Richmond, VA [email protected]

D. Architect: Andrea Almond, Landscape Architect, Senior Project Manager3North ArchitectsO 804.232.8900F 804.232.2092201 West 7th StreetRichmond, VA [email protected]

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

mailto:[email protected]


December 12, 2016

SUMMARY 011000 - 2

1. Complete restoration of Monroe Park and Checkers House building to include the following work items: Demolition of existing asphaltic walkways. Installation of stone dust and brick walkways, bio-retention filters, storm & sanitary drainage, tree allees, plantings, irrigation system, site lighting, brick & granite plaza, ornamental iron railings, site furnishings. Renovation of interior & exterior of two- story historic building. Rehabilitation of existing fountain.

B. Type of Contract: Lump Sum Contract

1.4 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

1.5 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

C. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.

1.6 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard.


December 12, 2016

SUMMARY 011000 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000


December 12, 2016

UNIT PRICES 012200 - 1

SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.


1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.3 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.

B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES

A. Unit Price 13a - Permeable Pavers

1. Description: Provide permeable pavers per the Landscape and Civil drawings and according to Section 321443 Permeable Unit Pavers.

2. Unit of Measurement: Square Feet


December 12, 2016


B. Item 15 - Sitework - Sidewalk at Laurel Street (between Main St and Cathedral Place):

1. Unit Price 15a - Replace Concrete Curb with Granite Curb

a. Description: Replace perimeter concrete curb with granite curb according to Civil Drawings C4.1-C4.4, C7.2 and all other applicable drawings and according to Section 024119 "Selective Demolition."

b. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot.

2. Unit Price 15b - Demo Existing Concrete Sidewalk

a. Description: Demolish existing Concrete sidewalk to the extent shown on Civil Drawings C4.1-C4.4, C7.2 and all other applicable drawings. and according to Section 024119 "Selective Demolition."

b. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Foot

3. Unit Price 15c - Brick courtesy strip

a. Description: Provide brick courtesy strip assembly as shown on landscape drawings and all other applicable drawings and according to Section 321400 "Unit Paving." Assembly to include but not limited to Brick paving, sand setting bed, aggregate and compacted sub-grade.

b. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot

4. Unit Price 15d- Metal Edging

a. Description: Provide metal edging as shown on the landscape drawings. b. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot

5. Unit Price 15e - Planting Strip

a. Description: Provide Sod strip assembly per Landscape drawings and according to Section 329300 "Plants". Include excavation for and installation of 24" topsoil.


6. Unit Price 15f - Brick Sidewalk

a. Description: Provide brick sidewalk assembly as shown on landscape drawings and all other applicable drawings. and according to Section 321400 "Unit Paving." Assembly to include but not limited to Brick paving field and edging, sand setting bed, aggregate and compacted sub-grade.


7. Unit Price 15g - Trees

a. Description: Provide trees per landscape drawings and all other applicable drawings. and according to Section 329300 "Plants."

b. Unit of Measurement: Each

8. Unit Price 15h - Lighting

a. Description: Provide MP1 Perimeter fixture, poles, base, conduit and wiring per the Electrical drawings.


December 12, 2016


b. Unit of Measurement: Each



December 12, 2016

ADDITIVES 012300 - 1

SECTION 012300 - ADDITIVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for additives.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Additive: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Additives described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.2. The cost or credit for each additive is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to

incorporate additive into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.3 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the additive into Project.

1. Include as part of each additive, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of additive.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each additive. Indicate if additives have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to additives.

C. Execute accepted additives under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A schedule of additives is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each additive.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ADDITIVES

A. Additive No. 1: Two Entranceway Pylons - Granite entry pylons with integrated and stand alone granite benches. Steel banner posts and integrated LED lighting provided with pylons.


December 12, 2016

ADDITIVES 012300 - 2

1. Base Bid: Install conduit to (7) locations designated to power future pylons, as indicated on Sheet E1.2 Electrical Site Plan Power.

2. Additive: Install one set of pylons with associated benches, poles and lighting as specified in Sheets LA2.3, LA2.4, LA2.5, LA2.6, LA2.7 and EA1.1 Additive Electrical Site Plan Lighting.

B. Additive No.2: Rill: Linear granite water feature along pathway with integrated pump and lighting.

1. Base Bid: Install capped waterline and Rill pump vault in locations indicated on Sheet C6.3 SW Quadrant Utility Plan. Provide conduit to pump vault as shown on Sheet E1.1 Electrical Site Plan Lighting.

2. Additive: Install Rill and associated Lighting and Fountain Equipment per the following Sheets:

a. LA4.1 Rill Layout Planb. LA4.2 Rill Detailsc. LA4.3 Rill Elevationsd. LA4.4 Rill Sectionse. LA4.5 Rill Cross Sectionsf. LA4.6 Rill Plansg. EA1.1Site Plan Lightingh. EA1.2 Fixture Schedule



December 12, 2016

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use .

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied:


December 12, 2016

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.c. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when all of the following conditions are satisfied:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results.d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.




December 12, 2016

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit prices.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.b. Submittal schedule.c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location.b. Name of Architect.c. Architect's project number.d. Contractor's name and address.e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.

3. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.4. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications

for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

5. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

6. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. Each item shall include labor cost and materials.


December 12, 2016

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

7. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.





December 12, 2016

LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT/STABILIZATION/STABILIZATION 013280 - 1

SECTION 13280 – LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT/STABILIZATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and other

Sections may apply to work of this section. The work shall be performed in accordance with these specifications.

1.2 SCOPE A. The Lead Abatement/Stabilization Specification was developed from the information obtained from the Lead-

Based Paint Survey Report dated November 22, 2016, which was created by France Environmental, Inc. B. The intent of this project WILL NOT BE a Lead-Free Building. C. The scope of work covered by this specification includes the removal; and/or containerization; and/or

disposal of lead-based painted/contaminated building materials; and decontamination of surfaces affected by lead dust during renovation/demolition operations. The contractor shall reference Architectural Design Documents to determine the extent of the renovation project and what components painted with lead-based paint will be disturbed. There are two (2) parts to this scope of work, which includes total removal of lead-containing building materials; and scraping of loose and flaking paint from lead-containing building materials and have building materials primed to remain in place. The scope of work generally includes the following:

1. Removal and disposal of lead-based paint building materials in order to safely perform other renovation

activities from the following components if they are scheduled to be demolished during the scheduled renovation and restoration project: (This “Scope of Work” can be completed by General/Demolition Contractor and/or Lead Abatement Contractor, however if General/Demolition Contractor conducts this work, CAN ONLY BE CONDUCTED AFTER LEAD ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR HAS COMPLETED ALL LEAD STABILIZATION; LEAD HAZARD CLEANUP; AND FINAL CLEARANCE FOR REOCCUPANCY HAS BEEN ISSUED BY CONSULTANT – NO EXCEPTIONS)!

Interior: Wooden Attic Access Door Trim Wooden Door Trim Metal Baseboards Wooden Doors Metal Radiators Exterior: Metal Brick Lintels Metal Louvered Vents Wooden Doors Metal Door Frames


December 12, 2016


2. Perform lead stabilization “scrape” of loose and flaking lead-based paint building materials and prime all “scraped” building materials in order to safely perform other renovation activities from the following components if they will be disturbed during the scheduled renovation project: (This “Scope of Work” can be completed by Lead Abatement Contractor ONLY)!

Interior: Wooden Windowsills Wooden Chair Rails Plaster Walls Plaster Ceilings Metal Window Frames Concrete Ceilings Brick Walls Exterior: Metal Round Downspouts Metal Handrails Wooden Fascia Wooden Porch Ceiling

3. The majority of lead painted items listed above will be demolished as a part of the planned renovation.

The Contractor shall contract with a consulting/testing company or self collect representative demolition waste stream samples and submit for Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) analysis. Should TCLP results reveal lead concentration of 5 parts per million (PPM) or higher, the waste stream must be handled and disposed of as hazardous waste. If results reveal lead concentrations below 5 PPM, the lead containing building materials can be removed/disposed of as normal construction debris.

D. Compliance with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations and the use of the best available

technology, procedures, and methods for preparation, execution, cleanup, disposal, and safety are required. This compliance is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. All terms not defined herein shall have the meaning given in the applicable publications, regulations, and specifications.

1. AUTHORIZED VISITORS: Any visitor authorized by the Owner’s Representative or any

representatives of a regulatory agency having jurisdiction over the project. 2. AIR MONITORING: The process of measuring micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air in a

stated time. For this project, NIOSH Analytical Methods 7082 shall be used. 3. AMENDED WATER: Water to which a surfactant has been added. 4. DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM: (NOT USED) 5. EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM:

(NOT USED)

6. HAZARDOUS WASTE: Any discarded material (liquid, solid or gaseous) which meets the definition of hazardous material or is designated hazardous waste by the U.S. EPA or the State Hazardous Control Authority.

7. HEPA FILTER: A high efficiency particle air (HEPA) filter capable of trapping and retaining 99.97%

of particles greater than 0.3 microns in diameter.


December 12, 2016


8. HEPA VACUUM EQUIPMENT: A vacuuming system equipped with HEPA filtration capable of collecting and retaining lead particles. Filters should be capable of removing particles greater than 0.3 microns in diameter with 99.97 % efficiency.

9. LEAD ABATEMENT/STABILIZATION: Procedure to control release of lead contaminants during

removal of lead paint from painted components. 10. LEAD CONTROL AREA: An area where lead removal operations are performed which is sealed

and/or isolated by physical barriers to prevent the spread of lead-contaminated dust. 11. NIOSH: National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. 12. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 13. PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM:

(NOT USED) 14. PLASTICIZE: To cover surfaces with plastic sheets as herein specified. 15. REGULATED AREA: A work area protected by polyethylene sheeting where lead removal

operations are performed within a Lead Control Area. 16. REMOVAL: The act of removing and transporting lead-based painted materials from the work site

to a suitable disposal site. 17. SCRAPE: Procedures to remove lead-based paint from a building component utilizing hand

scrapers, wet methods, chemical removal etc., while keeping the building component intact. 18. SEAL-OFF: Procedures to make an area airtight, using polyethylene sheeting, adhesives and/or

tape.

19. SURFACTANT: A chemical wetting agent, added to water to improve penetrations, thus reducing the quantity of water required for a given operation area.

20. WASTE HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: Any waste which because of its quantity, concentration or

physical, chemical, or infectious characteristics may pose a substantial hazard to human health or the environment. This definition includes wastewater and/or chemicals utilized in the Abatement/Stabilization or decontamination procedures.

21. WET CLEANING: The process of eliminating lead contamination from surfaces and objects by

using cloths, mops, or other cleaning tools that have been dampened with water, and by afterwards disposing of these cleaning tools as lead-contaminated waste.

22. WASTE GENERATOR: Any owner or operator of a source covered by RCRA regulations whose

act or process produces lead-containing waste. 23. WORK AREA: Designated areas of the project in which lead Abatement/Stabilization actions are to

be undertaken or which may become contaminated as a result of such Abatement/Stabilization actions. A contained work area is a work area that has been sealed, plasticized, and equipped with a decontamination enclosure system. Abatement/Stabilization procedures utilizing abrasive techniques will require additional engineering controls i.e. HEPA Filtration Devices, required respiratory and worker protection as outlined in 29 CFR, Section 1926. A non-contained area is an isolated or controlled-access work area that has not been plasticized nor equipped with a decontamination enclosure system.


December 12, 2016


1.4 SEQUENCING OF LEAD REMOVAL

A. Sequencing of Lead Removal will be coordinated by the General Contractor; AECOM; and/or Architect. 1. Post appropriate signs to comply with 29 CFR, Section 1926.62 and Commonwealth of Virginia

regulations prior to beginning Abatement/Stabilization project. 2. Owner’s Representative will perform daily and/or periodic project monitoring. 3. Prepare the work area as indicated. 4. Remove lead utilizing methods indicated. 5. Contain and label contaminated material, as indicated. 6. Visual inspection will be performed by the Owner’s Representative after Abatement/Stabilization is

complete. B. Lead Abatement/Stabilization contractor is required to perform OSHA compliance air monitoring during the

removal. 1.5 SITE SECURITY

A. The work area is to be restricted only to authorized, trained, and protected personnel. These may include the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors, Owner and his representatives, state and local inspectors and any other designated individuals. A list of authorized personnel shall be established prior to job start and posted in the clean room of the work decontamination area.

B. A logbook shall be maintained and anyone who enters the work area must record name, social security

number, time in and time out for each entry. 1.6 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

A. The standard operating procedure during lead paint removal to ensure maximum protection and safeguard against lead exposure of the workers, visitors, and employees shall be as follows:

1. Don proper protective clothing and respiratory protection prior to entering the workspace. 2. There shall be no eating, drinking, or smoking in or around the work area. 3. Packing, labeling, loading, transporting, and disposing of contaminated material shall be done

using sealed drums with 6-mil polyethylene bags as liners to avoid the release of lead particulate and/or carefully double-wrapped (6-mil polyethylene) and sealed for oblong objects. Sharp debris or objects should be sealed in drums and all other debris in bags.

4. Emergency evacuation procedures for medical and/or safety reasons shall be posted at the

Entrance to all contaminated areas and understood by all Employees. 5. Appropriated safety devices and measures shall be used in the workspace, to remove hazards

from electrical shocks, slippery surfaces, elevated work surfaces and entanglements in loose hoses or other equipment.

6. The Contractor shall have a certified/licensed Lead-Based Paint (LBP) Abatement/Stabilization

Supervisor available at all times when lead Abatement/Stabilization work is being performed who will function as Competent person and who shall:


December 12, 2016


a. Monitor the set up of the work area. b. Control entry and exit into the work area. c. Ensure that employees are adequately trained in the use of engineering controls, proper

work practices, proper protective equipment and in decontamination procedures. All workers are required to have successfully completed a LBP workers training course with valid certification and medical.

1.7 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and other Sections may, apply to work of this Section. The work shall be performed in accordance with these specifications.

1.8 PLAN OF ACTION

A. Submit a detailed removal and disposal plan of the procedures proposed for use in complying with the requirements of this specification. Include in the Plan of Action the location and layout of decontamination areas, the sequencing of lead Abatement/Stabilization work, the interface of trades involved in the performance of work, methods to be used to assure the safety of building occupants and visitors to the site, disposal methods including the location of an approved disposal site, and prevention of lead contamination; the method of removal to prohibit visible emissions in the work area, and packaging of removed lead-based painted material. The plan must be accepted by the Owner’s Representative prior to the commencement of work. Failure to submit the Plan of Action in a timely fashion does not constitute an extension of time for the project.

1.9 POTENTIAL LEAD HAZARD

A. The disturbance or dislocation of LBP materials may cause lead contaminated dust to be released into the atmosphere, creating a potential health hazard to workmen and occupants. Apprise all workers, supervisory personnel, subcontractors and consultants who will be at the job site of the seriousness of the hazard and of proper work procedures that must be followed. Post the work area in accordance with this section.

1. Medical Removal

a. OSHA Part 1926.62 requires Abatement/Stabilization workers are removed from any job

site due to lead exposure if: 1. Blood lead level is greater that 50 µg/dl. 2. Physician recommends on basis of other medical evidence.

2. Emergency Precautions

a. The Contractor shall be prepared to administer first aid to injured personnel after

decontamination. Employees shall be trained in evacuation procedures in the event of workplace emergencies. Seriously injured personnel shall be treated immediately and evacuated without delay for decontamination. When an injury occurs, the Contractor shall stop work and implement particulate reduction techniques (e.g., water spraying) until the injured person has been removed from the work area. The Contractor shall have a first aid kit on site.

b. The contractor’s Hazard Communication Program must be on site at all times. A fire

extinguisher shall be kept at the entrance to the work area. If a loss of electrical power is experienced, all personnel must cease work and proceed to the decontamination facility and exit the work area using proper decontamination procedures.


December 12, 2016


1.10 STOP WORK

A. If the Owner or Owner’s Representative presents a written stop work order, immediately and automatically stop all work. Do not restart work until authorized in writing by the Owner or the Representative.

1.11 LEAD-CONTAINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to FEI Lead-Based Paint Survey report dated November 22, 2016. 1.12 SUBMITTALS

A. Before the start of work, submit the following submittals to the Owner’s Representative for review. Do not begin work until these submittals are returned with the Owner Representative’s approval. 1. Plan of Action: Submit as a written report in the same manner as described above. 2. Copy of state or local license for waste hauler, if applicable. 3. Name and address of landfill where lead-containing waste materials are to be dumped. Include

contact personnel and telephone number, if applicable. 4. Chain-of-custody form of proposed waste manifest. 5. Respiratory Fit Test Records: Submit current fit test records for employees. 6. Medical Surveillance: Submit current physical for employees directly involved with this project.

The records should include blood tests for lead exposure. 7. State and Local License: Submit evidence that all workers have been trained, certified and/or

accredited as required by state or local codes or regulations. 8. Submit MSDS for all chemical products including solvents, strippers, etc.

1.13 CODES AND REGULATIONS

A. GENERAL APPLICABILITY OF CODES AND REGULATIONS, AND STANDARDS: Except to the extent that more explicit or more stringent requirements are written directly into the Contract Documents, all applicable codes, regulations, and standards have the same force and effect (and are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference) as if copied directly into the Contract Documents, or as if published copies are bound herewith.

B. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY: The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for the

compliance with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations pertaining to work practices, hauling, disposal, and protection of workers, visitors to the site, and persons occupying areas adjacent to the site. The Contractor is responsible for providing medical examinations and maintaining medical records of personnel as required by the applicable Federal, State, and local regulations.

C. FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS: LBP Abatement/Stabilization work or hauling and disposal of lead waste

materials include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. OSHA: U.S. Department of Labor, OSHA, including but not limited to:

a. Worker Protection - Lead Construction Standard

Title 29, Part 1926, Section 62 of the Code of Federal Regulations


December 12, 2016


b. Respiratory Protection Title 29, Part 1910, Section 134 of the Code of Federal Regulations c. Lead Standard Title 29, Part 1910.1025, of the Code of Federal Regulations d. Access to Employee Exposure & Medical Records Title 29, Part 1910, Section 20 of the Code of Federal Regulations e. Hazard Communication Title 29, Part 1910, Section 1200 of the Code of Federal Regulations f. Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags Title 29, Part 1910, Section 145 of the Code of Federal Regulations

2. DOT: U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT), including but not limited to

a. Hazardous Substances Title 29, Part 171 and 172 of the Code of Federal Regulations

3. EPA: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), including but not limited to

a. Conservation and Resource Recovery Act (RCRA) Title 29, Part 261-265 of the Code of Federal Regulations

D. STATE REQUIREMENTS: Abide by all state requirements that govern lead Abatement/Stabilization work and/or

hauling and disposal of lead waste materials.


December 12, 2016


PART 2 - EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 2.1 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Air Filtration Device (AFD): Lead filtration devices shall utilize HEPA filtration systems. B. Blast Vacuum Equipment: Utilizes a blasting media to abrade the painted surface. The media and paint

chips are recovered by a vacuum device. All blast equipment utilized in the work area shall utilize HEPA filtration systems.

C. Needle Gun: Utilizes multiple oscillating needles that chip the painted surfaces. All needle gun equipment

utilized in the work area shall utilize HEPA filtration systems. D. Portable Shower: For personnel decontamination. E. Scaffolding: Provide all scaffolding, ladders and/or staging, etc., as standing type such as metal tube and

coupler, tubular welded frame, pole or outrigger type or cantilever type and must be implemented by a professional scaffolding company. The type, erection and use all scaffolding shall comply with all applicable OSHA regulations. The contractor shall be responsible for any damage that occurs as a result from improper scaffolding use.

F. Other Tools and Equipment: The Abatement/Stabilization Contractor shall provide other suitable tools for

stripping, removal, and disposal activities including, but not limited to, hand-held scraper, wire brushes, rounded edge shovels, brooms and carts.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Sheet: A single polyethylene film in the largest sheet size possible to minimize seams, 4.0 or 6.0 mil thick as indicated; clear, frosted, or black as indicated. Polyethylene utilized for exterior work shall be a 12 mil reinforced plastic.

B. Duct Tape: Provide duct tape in 2” or 3” widths as indicated, with an adhesive that is formulated to stick

aggressively to sheet polyethylene. C. Spray Adhesive: Provide spray adhesive in aerosol cans that is specifically formulated to stick tenaciously to

sheet polyethylene. D. Coveralls: Provide disposable full-body coveralls, disposal head cover and gloves. E. Half-face Respiratory and HEPA Filters: Provide the appropriate respirators and filters used in lead dust

Abatement/Stabilization environment with minimum protection up to 500 µg/m3. F. Vacuum and Exhaust Equipment: Provide HEPA filtered vacuum and exhaust equipment. G. Impermeable Containers: Suitable to receive and retain any lead containing or contaminated materials for

disposal at an approved site. The containers shall be labeled in accordance with OSHA Regulations. Containers must be both air and watertight and must be resistant to damage and rupture. The containers shall be of two parts: 55-gallons capacity steel or plastic drums with tightly fitting lids for all demo materials and/or sharp objects.

H. Warning Labels and Signs: Lead warning signs for posting at perimeter of work area, as required by OSHA

and EPA.


December 12, 2016


I. Other Materials: Provide all other materials such as, but not limited to, lumber, plywood, nails and such hardware that may be required to properly prepare and complete this project.

1. Solvents Envirostrip 1 - alkaline paste

800 No Lye Grip `N’ Strip - alkaline paste; or approved equivalent

2. Neutralizer Neutra-Clean - neutralizes the caustic Envirostrip 1 800 Neutralizer - neutralized the caustic. No Ly Lye Grip,

`N’ Strip; or approved equivalent 3. Trisodium phosphate Envirostrip TSP - used for final wash down of abated surfaces; or

approved equivalent a. Substitution of equivalent solvents, neutralizer and washdown chemical shall be

approved by Owners environmental consultant. b. Chemical stripping removers: chemical removers shall contain no methylene chloride

products. 2.3 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION A. Types of Respirators: Instruct and train each worker involved with lead Abatement/Stabilization in proper

respirator use and require that each worker always wear a respirator, properly fitted on the face in the Work Area from the start of any operation which may cause airborne lead dust until the Work Area is completely decontaminated. Use respiratory protection appropriate for the lead contaminated dust level encountered in the work place or as required for other toxic or oxygen-deficient situations encountered.

B. Standards: Except to the extent that more stringent requirements are written directly into the Contract

Documents, the following regulations and standards have the same force and effect, and are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference, as if copied directly into the Contract Documents, or as if published copies were bound herewith. Where there is a conflict in requirements set forth in these regulations and standards, the more stringent requirement shall govern. 1. OSHA - U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Safety and

Health Standards 29 CFR 1910.1025 and Section 1910.134. 2. CGA - Compressed Gas Association, Inc., New York, Pamphlet G-7, “Compressed Air for Human

Respiration,” and Specification G-7.1. “Commodity Specification for Air.” 3. ANSI - American National Standard Practices for Respiratory Protection, ANSI Z88.2-1980. 4. NIOSH - National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. 5. MSHA - Mine Safety and Health Administration.

C. Respiratory Protection Program: Comply with ANSI Z88.2-1980 “Practices for Respiratory Protection” and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1025. 1. Require respiratory protection be used at all times when there is any possibility of disturbance of

lead-based painted materials whether intentional and/or accidental. In addition to the HEPA filters, the contractor is responsible to protect their workers from any chemical fumes. Organic cartridges should also be available, if necessary.


December 12, 2016


2. Require that a respirator be worn by anyone in a Work Area at all times regardless of activity, during a period that starts with any operation that could cause airborne lead dust, until the area has been cleared for re-occupancy by the Owner’s Representative.

3. Regardless of Airborne Lead Levels, require that the minimum level of respiratory protection used

be half-face air-purifying respirators with high efficiency filters. D. Fit Testing

1. Initial Fitting: Provide initial fitting of respiratory protection during a respiratory protection course of training. Fit test type of respirator to be actually worn by each individual. Allow an individual to use only those respirators for which training and fit testing have been provided.

2. As needed check the fit of each worker’s respirator. 3. Upon Each Wearing: Require each time an air-purifying respirator is put on, it shall be checked for

fit with a positive and negative pressure fit test in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions or ANSI Z88.2 (1980).

E. Type of Respiratory Protection Required: Provide Respiratory Protection as indicated in paragraph below.

Where the paragraph below does not apply, determine the proper level of protection by dividing the expected or actual airborne lead count in the Work Area by the “protection factor” given below. The level of respiratory protection that supplies an airborne lead level inside the respirator, at the breathing zone of the wearer, at or below the permissible exposure limit (PEL) is the minimum level of protection allowed.

F. Respiratory Protection Factor

Respirator Type Protection Factor Air purifying: 10 Negative pressure respirator High efficiency filter Half face-piece Air purifying: 50 Negative pressure respirator High efficiency filter Full face-piece, Quantitative Fit test Powered Air Purifying (PAPR): 1,000 Positive pressure respirator, Tight-fitting High efficiency filter Half or full face-piece

Type C supplied air: 1,000 Positive pressure respirator Pressure demand or other positive pressure mode Half face-piece Type C supplied air: 2,000 Positive pressure respirator Pressure demand or other positive pressure mode


December 12, 2016


Full face-piece Type C supplied air: 10,000 Positive pressure respirator Pressure demand or other positive pressure mode Full face-piece equipped with an auxiliary positive pressure Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA)

G. Air Purifying Respirators

1. Negative pressure half or full-face mask: Supply a sufficient quantity of respirator filters approved for lead dust, so that workers can change filters as required. Respirators shall be wet-rinsed and filters discarded each time a worker leaves the work area. Require that new filters be installed each time a worker re-enters the Work Area. Store respirators and filters at the job site in the changing room and protect totally from exposure to lead prior to their use.

2. Powered Air Purifying half or full-face mask: Supply a sufficient quantity of high efficiency

respirator filters approved for lead dust so that workers can change filters at any time that flow through the face piece decreases to the level at which the manufacturer recommends filter replacement. Regardless of flow, filter cartridges should be replaced after 16 hours of use. HEPA elements in filter cartridges should be protected from wetting during showering. The exterior housing of respirator, including blower unit, filter cartridges, hoses, battery pack, face mask, belt, and cords, should be washed each time a worker leaves the Work Area. Caution should be used to avoid electrical shorting of battery pack during washing. Provide an extra battery pack for each respirator so that one can be charging while one is in use.

H. Protective Clothing: The contractor shall: 1. Provide protective disposable clothing consisting of full-body coveralls, head covers, gloves, and

boot covers or reusable footwear, to all workers, foremen, superintendents and authorized visitors and inspectors. All exposed areas of the skin must be covered with a protective layer and all seams must be taped closed.

2. Provide eye and ear protection and hard hats as required by job conditions and safety regulations. 3. All disposable protective clothing shall be discarded and disposed of as lead containing waste

every time the wearer exits from the workspace. I. Air Monitoring: (NOT USED) 2.4 SPILL CLEAN-UP A. The contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer/Owner’s Representative immediately upon discovery of a

spill. B. The contractor shall initiate spill clean up within one (1) hour of discovery using methods that will not allow

lead particulate and lead-contaminated waste to become airborne. C. The contractor shall maintain emergency spill clean-up equipment on site.


December 12, 2016


PART 3 - EXECUTION OF ABATEMENT/STABILIZATION 3.1 PRE-LEAD ABATEMENT/STABILIZATION PREPARATIONS A. The Contractor shall secure the approval of the Owner prior to the start of the work for the following:

notification of EPA Region 3; standard operating procedures; personnel training and testing, storage, and sealing off and securing of the work area before and after the start of each shift/each day. All personnel training must be from an approved training facility including but not exclusive to worker and supervisor training.

B. Prior to any Abatement/Stabilization work in an area each area shall be demarcated with barrier tape and

appropriate signs. Materials to be removed shall be identified as per the contract documents. C. The control areas shall be restricted to everyone other than trained personnel and authorized visitors. Erect

signs at accesses to the work area in accordance with EPA, OSHA, Virginia regulations, the specification, and this plan. Maintain a log of all people entering and exiting the control area.

D. All power drilling, tools, etc., will be equipped with a HEPA Vacuum attachment in order to collect all

generated lead dust.

E. Pre/Post-Abatement/Stabilization lead-in air; lead-in dust wipe; lead-in soil samples may be collected by the Owner’s Representative and analyzed in accordance with HUD Guidelines, prior to Abatement/Stabilization.

3.2 LEAD ABATEMENT/STABILIZATION PROCEDURE - REGULATED AREAS A. Personnel respiratory protection shall be as described in Paragraph 2.3. Workers shall double suit, utilize

gloves, boots, and respirator. Respirators shall be equipped with cartridges as required by chemical and/or chemical strippers.

B. Emergency eye wash station will be utilized for this job. C. Air monitoring shall be in accordance with the requirements of the specification. D. Work area preparation and lead paint removal.

1. Contractor’s workers shall wear full personnel protective equipment when performing any lead Abatement/Stabilization work unless all personal air-monitoring results are below 30 µg/m3.

2. Remove lead-based paint and materials as described in Part 1, 1.1.A and the specifications.

E. If Contractor uses any type of scraping and cutting methods on the surfaces, all visible debris accumulated

will be HEPA vacuumed and disposed of properly. F. Contractor shall allow for at least a half-hour at the end of each day to clean and decontaminate the work

area. Contractor shall also clean all tools and vehicles leaving the work area. G. If required, Final clearance shall consist of visual examination of the abated area along with lead-in dust wipe

samples. H. Immediately remove any lead-based paint containing debris that collects on the polyethylene by using a

HEPA vacuum and/or wet removal methods prior to leaving work area at shift end. I. Control disposal of lead contaminants to offsite areas.


December 12, 2016


3.3 CLEANING

A. After Abatement/Stabilization activities are concluded HEPA vacuum debris and wet wipe polyethylene until surfaces are visibly clean.

3.4 FINAL INSPECTION

A. After final cleanup is complete, the final inspection will take place. Special attention will be given to areas where lead paint/contaminated building materials have been removed. The Owner and/or Owner’s Representative will conduct a final visual inspection with the Contractor and may collect final clearance lead-in dust wipe samples in accordance with HUD Guidelines, prior to reoccupancy.

3.5 DISPOSAL

A. This portion describes the disposal of lead-containing materials. Accomplish disposal either by landfill and/or other acceptable methods of treating lead-containing materials. Waste containing 5-PPM lead or greater when tested by Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) shall be treated as hazardous waste under RCRA by Owner’s testing laboratory. TCLP tests were not completed by the Owner(s) prior to the start of this project. The Contractor is directed to assume all waste generated under the removal methods be assumed NOT to be Hazardous Waste for purposes of bidding.

B. Waste Evaluation: The Contractor shall characterize the waste produced by Abatement/Stabilization to

determine which types are hazardous. TCLP testing will be performed by accredited testing laboratory approved by Owner. The Owner has the final right of refusal and may require additional testing. The determination can be based on the prior experience or knowledge of the Contractor. If prior experience is not adequate to characterize a waste, testing must be performed to determine whether the waste exhibits one (1) of the four (4) RCRA characteristic of hazardous waste: ignitiability, corrosivity, reactivity, and toxicity.

C. Determining Generator Status: The results of the waste evaluation are used to determine whether or not the

Abatement/Stabilization Contractor is conditionally exempt (no more than 100 Kilograms per month), small (100-1000 Kilograms per month) or large (1000 Kilograms or more per month) generator. Generator status is determined by the amount of waste generated per month at the Abatement/Stabilization site. Conditionally exempt generators (no more than 100 Kilograms per month) are required only to dispose of their waste in compliance with state regulations, which in most states, means that they must label their waste and take it to a licensed solid waste disposal facility. Both small (non-exempt) and large generators must follow additional procedures described below.

D. Obtaining an EPA Identification Number: Unless the contractor is exempt, an EPA Identification Number

must be obtained for each Abatement/Stabilization site. The assignment of an ID number takes 3-6 weeks, so the application should be submitted well in advance of the start of Abatement/Stabilization.

E. Disposal of Wastes: Waste must be segregated into solid and hazardous wastes. Wastes should neither be

left on the property in an unsecured area, nor dumped in an unauthorized dumpster. Lead-containing wash water should not be flushed into storm drains or sanitary sewers without permission of local authorities.

1. Solid Waste Disposal: Solid waste that has been evaluated and determined not to be hazardous

can be disposed of in a state-approved landfill. 2. Hazardous Waste Disposal: Hazardous waste must be disposed of at a hazardous waste disposal

facility, usually called a treatment, storage, and disposal facility (TSD).


December 12, 2016


3. Disposal Procedures: a. Contractor shall package all lead waste in a 6-mil polyethylene bag lined steel or plastic

drum(s) approved by the U.S. Department of Transportation or alternatively, carefully double-wrapped (6-mil polyethylene) and sealed bundles for oblong objects. Sharp debris or objects should be sealed in drums and all other debris in bags. The Contractor must comply fully with these requirements of CFR 49, and all Virginia Department of Transportation requirements.

b. Waste drums shall be filled in such a way that at least 3 to 5 inches of space remains at

the top of the drum to the lid. c. The Contractor shall label all drums as lead containing materials; place the label in the

middle of the drum. d. Disposal of incidental materials such as spray cans, paints, clothing and rags is the

responsibility of the contractor. The previously mentioned materials are examples only, other material may be included as required to complete the Abatement/Stabilization.

e. The Contractor will label all generated waste drums for lead content according to TCLP

lead analytical results previously obtained from representative samples of LBP waste collected by Owners Environmental consultant.

f. The Abatement/Stabilization Contractor shall dispose of drums or wrap waste that is

classified as hazardous material wrap and drums in accordance with federal regulations (40 CFR 260-265 and 40 CFR 268) within 90 days of label date of drum. Copies of original waste disposal manifest shall be forwarded to the Owner within 30 days of disposal.

g. The contractor shall request of the owner an area to accumulate the packaged waste

prior to disposal. The area shall be lockable with enclosure and in a secure area, be barricaded with Danger Sign and Danger Tape (yellow and black, 3”).

4. Disposal Site Procedures Non-Hazardous Waste: At the disposal site, sealed plastic bag-lined

drums may be carefully unloaded from the truck. If drums are broken or damaged return to work site for rebagging. Clean the entire truck by HEPA vacuum and wet wipe methods.

5. Retain all copies of receipts, manifests, chain of custody forms, and submit to the Owner or the

Owner’s Representative at the conclusion of the project. 3.6 TERMINATION

A. Any disregard for the provisions of these specifications shall be deemed just and sufficient cause for termination of the Contractor or any Subcontractor without compromise or prejudice to the rights of the Contractor.



December 12, 2016

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and Construction Manager and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form acceptable to Owner and Architect.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.


December 12, 2016


1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect and Construction Manager reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Construction Manager's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Construction Manager will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., MPK-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., MPK-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect and Construction Manager.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Name and address of Architect.d. Name of Construction Manager.e. Name of Contractor.f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.h. Category and type of submittal.i. Submittal purpose and description.j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of

multiple items.k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.m. Related physical samples submitted directly.n. Indication of full or partial submittal.o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.q. Other necessary identification.r. Remarks.


December 12, 2016


E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

F. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's and Construction

Manager's action stamp.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's and Construction Manager's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements:

1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

b. Action Submittals: Email digital copy of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return one annotated digital copy.

c. Informational Submittals: Email digital copy of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect and Construction Manager will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.b. Manufacturer's product specifications.


December 12, 2016


c. Standard color charts.d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.e. Testing by recognized testing agency.f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.g. Notation of coordination requirements.h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.b. Printed performance curves.c. Operational range diagrams.d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.b. Schedules.c. Compliance with specified standards.d. Notation of coordination requirements.e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings

on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:


D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.b. Product name and name of manufacturer.c. Sample source.d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.


December 12, 2016


3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect and Construction Manager will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample.

1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Submit product schedule in the following format:


F. Coordination Drawings Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures.

I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."


December 12, 2016


J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

R. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

S. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

T. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect and Construction Manager.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."


December 12, 2016


C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S ACTION

A. General: Architect and Construction Manager will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect and Construction Manager will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect and Construction Manager will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:

1. No Exceptions Taken

2. Implement Exceptions Taken

3. Revise and Resubmit

4. Rejected

C. Informational Submittals: Architect and Construction Manager will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect and Construction Manager will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.



December 12, 2016

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

3. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.


December 12, 2016


H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report.2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if

not, what corrective action was taken.4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies

with requirements.5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

B. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


December 12, 2016



A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to

prevent delaying the Work.c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of

construction indicated for the completed Work.d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, [and ]mockups; do not

reuse products on Project.


December 12, 2016


2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect or Construction Manager.

2. Notify Architect and Construction Manager days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.4. Obtain Architect's and Construction Manager's approval of mockups before starting work,

fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.


December 12, 2016


D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work.2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting.

Assist agency in obtaining samples.4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified [testing agency] [special inspector] as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections[ and in Statement of Special Inspections attached to this Section], and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.7. <Insert requirements>.


December 12, 2016



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's, Commissioning Authority's, reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



December 12, 2016

REFERENCES 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.


December 12, 2016


1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com.2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org.3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org.4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;

www.transportation.org.5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org.6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org.7. ABMA - American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com.8. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.abma.com.9. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.10. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org.11. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org.12. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.13. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org.14. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org.15. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org.16. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org.17. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.18. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org.19. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org.20. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org.21. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.22. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.23. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org.24. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org.25. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org.26. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).27. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).28. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.29. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.30. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE).31. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers;

www.ashrae.org.32. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers); www.asme.org.33. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org.34. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org.35. ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org.36. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.37. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org.38. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org.39. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com.40. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com.41. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.42. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.43. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com.44. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com.45. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org.46. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association);

www.bifma.org.47. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org.


December 12, 2016


48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation); www.bissc.org.

49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org.50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca.51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org.52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com.53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org.54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com.55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org.56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org.57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com.60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org.61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org.62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca.64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa-

international.org.65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org.66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org.67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org.68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA).69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com.70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA).72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECIA).73. ECIA - Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org.74. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).75. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com.76. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org.77. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org.78. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA).79. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org.80. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org.81. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation);

www.fiba.com.82. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation);

www.fivb.org.83. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com.84. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com.85. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.;

www.floridaroof.com.86. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com.87. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org.88. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.89. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com.90. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org.91. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org.92. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI).93. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).94. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org.95. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com.96. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org.97. IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org.98. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA).


December 12, 2016


99. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).100. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.101. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net.102. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org.103. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.104. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch.105. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.106. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North

America); www.ies.org.107. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).108. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.109. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org.110. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu.111. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com.112. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA); www.intertek.com.113. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and

Automation Society); www.isa.org.114. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA).115. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface

Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org.116. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org.117. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA).118. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home.119. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org.120. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA).121. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.122. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.123. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org.124. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org.125. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org.126. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org.127. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com.128. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com.129. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com.130. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.mss-

hq.org.131. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org.132. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International);

www.nace.org.133. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com.134. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.orgwww.naima.org.135. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com.136. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org.137. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org.138. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.139. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org.140. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org.141. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org.142. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org.143. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org.144. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org.145. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org.146. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA).147. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org.148. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com.149. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org.


December 12, 2016


150. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA).151. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org.152. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net.153. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.154. NSF - NSF International; www.nsf.org.155. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org.156. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org.157. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com.158. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org.159. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.160. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org.161. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association);

www.plasa.org.162. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org.163. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.164. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com.165. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.org.166. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org.167. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org.168. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org.169. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com.170. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE).171. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org.172. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org.173. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org.174. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org.175. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org.176. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org.177. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org.178. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.179. SRCC - Solar Rating & Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org.180. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com.181. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org.182. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com.183. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com.184. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org.185. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org.186. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com.187. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org.188. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications

Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org.189. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).190. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org.191. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org.192. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org.193. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org.194. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.195. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org.196. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org.197. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org.198. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org.199. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org.200. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org.201. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org.202. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com.203. WI - Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.org.


December 12, 2016


204. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com.205. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de.2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org.3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.

C. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list.

1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys.

2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.

3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.

a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide;

www.wbdg.org/ccb.

6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB).

D. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic and Appliance Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov.

2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com.

3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH).4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal-iaq.org.5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov.6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.7. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic Development;

www.txforestservice.tamu.edu.





December 12, 2016



December 12, 2016

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

1.2 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction representative, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Contractor & Owners Representative Trailer/Field Office

A. The Contractor shall maintain a field office for the duration of the work with a separate lockable space for the owners representative. The owners representative space whether in the contractors trailer/field office or separate trailer/field office shall have at a minimum the following items: heating, a/c, indoor plumbing, a meeting table/chairs for at least (8) people, (1) desks, (1) ergonomic desk chair, (1) plan table, (1) filing cabinet, (1) Bluetooth capable printer that can print in color up to 11x17 with replacement ink as needed, Wi-Fi, water cooler service. The owners representative trailer/field office space must be cleaned at least once a week.


December 12, 2016

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as shown on Civil Drawings.

2. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."



December 12, 2016

TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 1

SECTION 015639 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction and indicated on Drawings.

B. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction and indicated on Drawings.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged.


A. Arborist Qualifications: Certified Arborist as certified by ISA, licensed arborist in jurisdiction where Project is located, current member of ASCA, or registered Consulting Arborist as designated by ASCA.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.2. Moving or parking vehicles or equipment.3. Foot traffic.4. Erection of sheds or structures.5. Impoundment of water.6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated.

B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones.


December 12, 2016


C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing for trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:

1. Type: Shredded hardwood.

B. Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting one of the following requirements: Previously used materials may be used when approved by Architect.

1. Wood Protection-Zone Fencing: Constructed of two 2-by-4-inch horizontal rails, with 4-by-4-

inch preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 96 inches apart, and lower rail set halfway between top rail and ground.

a. Height: 48 inches.

2. Plastic Protection-Zone Fencing: Plastic construction fencing constructed of high-density extruded

and stretched polyethylene fabric with 2-inch maximum opening in pattern and supported by

tubular or T-shape galvanized-steel posts spaced not more than 96 inches apart. High-visibility orange color.

a. Height: 48 inches.

C. Protection-Zone Signage: Shop-fabricated, rigid plastic or metal sheet with attachment holes prepunched and reinforced; legibly printed with nonfading lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.

B. Tree-Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside tree-protection zones and other areas shown. Do not exceed indicated thickness of mulch.


December 12, 2016


1. Apply uniform thickness of organic mulch as indicated on the drawings, unless otherwise

indicated. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of tree trunks.

3.3 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.


Specifications Monroe Park Renovation and Restoration December 12, 2016

EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.


EXECUTION 017300 - 2

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site.3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required

dimensions.4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by

authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.



December 12, 2016

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1

SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.2. Recycling nonhazardous [demolition] [and] [construction] waste.3. Disposing of nonhazardous [demolition] [and] [construction] waste.


1. Section 024116 "Structure Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements[, and for disposition of hazardous waste].

2. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements[, and for disposition of hazardous waste].

3. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

D. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

E. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials[.][, including the following:]


A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Include the following information:

1. Material category.2. Generation point of waste.


December 12, 2016


3. Total quantity of waste in tons.

4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.

5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.

6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.

B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work:

1. Clean salvaged items.2. Store items in a secure area until installation.3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.4. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment.

Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated.

B. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use:

1. Clean salvaged items.2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Asphalt Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility.

B. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.

C. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals.

1. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.

D. Metals: Separate metals by type.

1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.


December 12, 2016


E. Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Separate organic and glass-fiber asphalt shingles and felts. Remove and dispose of nails, staples, and accessories.

F. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.

G. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.

3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site.

For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.



December 12, 2016

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.2. Final completion procedures.3. Warranties.4. Final cleaning.5. Repair of the Work.


1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.


December 12, 2016


B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Construction Manager. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Construction Manager's signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel

of changeover in security provisions.3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and

systems. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders.8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction

tools, and similar elements.9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.


December 12, 2016


1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion

inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and

systems.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated copy.

1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as

necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to

identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.


December 12, 2016


3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of

stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according

to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove

glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.


December 12, 2016


l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.



December 12, 2016

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.3. Product maintenance manuals.4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information.

B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.2. Table of contents.3. Manual contents.

C. Title Page: Include the following information:


December 12, 2016


1. Subject matter included in manual.2. Name and address of Project.3. Name and address of Owner.4. Date of submittal.5. Name and contact information for Contractor.6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.7. Name and contact information for Architect.8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems

contained in the manuals.10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

G. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to

accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.


December 12, 2016


b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.2 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

2.3 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

C. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

D. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.


December 12, 2016


E. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



December 12, 2016

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings.2. Record Specifications.3. Record Product Data.


1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect and Construction Manager. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete,

redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution.4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in

recording information.

B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.2. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that

correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

3. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."d. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.e. Name of Contractor.


December 12, 2016


2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.


December 12, 2016


B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.



December 12, 2016

STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024116 - 1

SECTION 024116 - STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of buildings and site improvements.2. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.3. Salvaging items for reuse by Owner.


A. Schedule of building demolition with starting and ending dates for each activity.

B. Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged.

C. Predemolition photographs.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.


A. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;

immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

B. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Work."


December 12, 2016


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations.

B. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving buildings and structures to be demolished.

1. If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent occupied buildings, then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures.

2. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

C. Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris.2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.4. Transport items to storage area designated by Owner.5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing buildings.

B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during demolition operations. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated. Comply with requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

1. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.2. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of

groups of trees to remain.3. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage

to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.4. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area and to and

from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures.


December 12, 2016


D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place.

3.4 DEMOLITION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.

B. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.

C. Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

D. Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

E. Salvage: Items to be removed and salvaged are indicated on Drawings.

F. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Work."

G. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. See Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal" for recycling and disposal of demolition waste.

B. Do not burn demolished materials.



December 12, 2016

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner.

C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.


A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:

a. Park Lightingb. Bollardsc. Bike racksd. Benches

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

D. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.


December 12, 2016


1.5 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary

services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.c. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment and deliver to Owner.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.


December 12, 2016


1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.4. Transport items to Owner's storage area off-site.5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.


December 12, 2016


1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey

debris to grade level in a controlled descent.4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and

Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.



December 12, 2016

BRICK MASONRY REPAIR 040120.63 - 1

SECTION 040120.63 - BRICK MASONRY REPAIR

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes repairing brick masonry, including replacing units.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar: Mortar used to set and anchor masonry in a structure, distinct from pointing mortar installed after masonry is set in place.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Brick Masonry Repair Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced brick masonry repair firm to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. Experience in only installing masonry is insufficient experience for masonry repair work.

B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of brick masonry repair to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation.

1. Masonry Repair: Prepare sample areas for each type of masonry repair work performed. If not otherwise indicated, size each mockup not smaller than two adjacent whole units or approximately

48 inches in least dimension. Construct sample areas in locations in existing walls where directed by Architect unless otherwise indicated. Demonstrate quality of materials, workmanship, and blending with existing work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY MATERIALS

A. Face Brick: As required to complete brick masonry repair work.

1. Brick Matching Existing: Units with colors, color variation within units, surface texture, size, and shape that match existing brickwork.

a. For existing brickwork that exhibits a range of colors or color variation within units, provide brick that proportionally matches that range and variation rather than brick that matches an individual color within that range.


December 12, 2016


2. Special Shapes:

a. Provide molded, 100 percent solid shapes for applications where core holes or "frogs" could be exposed to view or weather when in final position and where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

b. Provide specially ground units, shaped to match patterns, for arches and where indicated.c. Mechanical chopping or breaking brick, or bonding pieces of brick together by adhesive, are

unacceptable procedures for fabricating special shapes.

2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction; white or gray, or both where required for color matching of mortar.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.

D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329/C 1329M.

E. Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144.

1. Exposed Mortar: Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as possible. Blend several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match.

2. Colored Mortar: Natural sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

F. Mortar Pigments: ASTM C 979/C 979M, compounded for use in mortar mixes, and having a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars.

G. Water: Potable.

2.3 MANUFACTURED REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Brick Patching Compound: Factory-mixed cementitious product that is custom manufactured for patching brick masonry.

1. Use formulation that is vapor and water permeable (equal to or more than the masonry unit), exhibits low shrinkage, has lower modulus of elasticity than masonry units being repaired, and develops high bond strength to all types of masonry.

2. Formulate patching compound in colors and textures to match each masonry unit being patched.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Setting Buttons and Shims: Resilient plastic, nonstaining to masonry, sized to suit joint thicknesses and bed depths of masonry units, less the required depth of pointing materials unless removed before pointing.

B. Other Products: Select materials and methods of use based on the following, subject to approval of a mockup:

1. Previous effectiveness in performing the work involved.2. Minimal possibility of damaging exposed surfaces.


December 12, 2016


3. Consistency of each application.4. Uniformity of the resulting overall appearance.5. Do not use products or tools that could leave residue on surfaces.

2.5 MORTAR MIXES

A. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious materials and sand in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in a clean, mechanical batch mixer.

B. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using specified ingredients. Do not alter specified proportions without Architect's approval.

1. Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not add pigment exceeding 10 percent by weight of the cementitious or binder materials, except for carbon black which is limited to 2 percent.

C. Do not use admixtures in mortar unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mixes: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions:

1. Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar by Type: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N or Type O whichever matches the existing mortar, unless otherwise indicated; with cementitious material limited to portland cement and limemasonry cement or mortar cement.

2. Pigmented, Colored Mortar: Add mortar pigments to produce exposed, setting (rebuilding) mortar of colors required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Remove gutters and downspouts adjacent to masonry and store during masonry repair. Reinstall when repairs are complete.

1. Provide temporary rain drainage during work to direct water away from building.

3.2 BRICK REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

A. At locations indicated, remove bricks that are damaged, spalled, or deteriorated.

B. Carefully remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding masonry, in a manner that permits replacement with full-size units.

C. Support and protect remaining masonry that surrounds removal area.

D. Maintain flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition.

E. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids, cracks, bulges, and loose units in existing masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.

F. Remove in an undamaged condition as many whole bricks as possible.


December 12, 2016


1. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from brick by cleaning with hand chisels, brushes, and water.

2. Remove sealants by cutting close to brick with utility knife and cleaning with solvents.

G. Clean masonry surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in preparation for brick replacement.

H. Replace removed damaged brick with other removed brick in good condition, where possible, matching existing brick. Do not use broken units unless they can be cut to usable size.

I. Install replacement brick into bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. If cutting is required, use a motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges.

1. Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing joints.2. Use setting buttons or shims to set units accurately spaced with uniform joints.

J. Lay replacement brick with rebuilding (setting) mortar and with completely filled bed, head, and collar joints. Butter ends with enough mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet both replacement and

surrounding bricks that have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 g/30 sq. in. per min. Use wetting methods that ensure that units are nearly saturated but surface is dry when laid.

1. Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets according to Section 040120.64 "Brick Masonry Repointing." Point at same time as repointing of surrounding area.

2. When mortar is hard enough to support units, remove shims and other devices interfering with pointing of joints.

K. Curing: Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive hours, including weekends and holidays.

1. Hairline cracking within the mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is unacceptable. Completely remove such mortar and repoint.

3.3 FINAL CLEANING

A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, applied by low pressure spray.

1. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes.2. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.

END OF SECTION 040120.63


December 12, 2016

BRICK MASONRY REPOINTING 040120.64 - 1

SECTION 040120.64 - BRICK MASONRY REPPONTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes repointing joints with mortar.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Brick Masonry Repointing Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced brick masonry repointing firm to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. Experience in only installing masonry is insufficient experience for masonry repointing work.

B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of brick masonry repointing to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Repointing: Rake out joints in two separate areas, each approximately 36 inches high by 48

inches wide, unless otherwise indicated, for each type of repointing required, and repoint one of the areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction; white or gray, or both where required for color matching of mortar.

1. Provide cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.



1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Lafarge North America Inc.; Lafarge Masonry Cement.b. Lehigh Hanson, Inc.; [Lehigh Masonry Cement] [Lehigh White Masonry Cement].

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=9475&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456934837&mf=&src=wd



December 12, 2016


D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329/C 1329M.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Lafarge North America Inc.; Lafarge Mortar Cement.b. .

E. Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144.

1. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as possible. Blend several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match.

2. Color: Provide natural sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

F. Mortar Pigments: ASTM C 979/C 979M, compounded for use in mortar mixes, and having a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars.

G. Water: Potable.

2.2 MORTAR MIXES

A. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious materials and sand in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in a clean, mechanical batch mixer.

1. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious materials and sand together before adding any water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that retains its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 15 to 30 minutes. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within one hour of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.

B. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using specified ingredients. Do not alter specified proportions without Architect's approval.

1. Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not add pigment exceeding 10 percent by weight of the cementitious or binder materials, except for carbon black which is limited to 2 percent.

C. Do not use admixtures in mortar unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mixes: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions:

1. Pointing Mortar by Type: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N unless otherwise indicated; with cementitious material limited to portland cement and lime . Add mortar pigments to produce mortar colors required.




December 12, 2016


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Remove gutters and downspouts and associated hardware adjacent to masonry and store during masonry repointing. Reinstall when repointing is complete.

1. Provide temporary rain drainage during work to direct water away from building.

3.2 REPOINTING MASONRY

A. Rake out and repoint joints to the following extent:

1. All joints in areas indicated.2. Joints indicated as sealant-filled joints. Seal joints according to Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."3. Joints at locations of the following defects:

a. Holes and missing mortar.

b. Cracks that can be penetrated 1/4 inch or more by a knife blade 0.027 inch thick.

c. Cracks 1/8 inch or more in width and of any depth.d. Hollow-sounding joints when tapped by metal object.

e. Eroded surfaces 1/4 inch or more deep.f. Deterioration to point that mortar can be easily removed by hand, without tools.g. Joints filled with substances other than mortar.

B. Do not rake out and repoint joints where not required.

C. Rake out joints as follows, according to procedures demonstrated in approved mockup:

1. Remove mortar from joints to depth of joint width plus 1/8 inch, but not less than 1/2 inch or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. Do not remove unsound mortar

more than 2 inches deep; consult Architect for direction.2. Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with square backs

and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris.

3. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace or patch damaged masonry units as directed by Architect.

D. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids in mortar joints, cracks, loose masonry units, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.

E. Pointing with Mortar:

1. Rinse joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time rinsing application so, at time of pointing, joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. If rinse water dries, dampen joint surfaces before pointing.

2. Apply pointing mortar first to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater than

surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8 inch until a uniform depth is formed. Fully compact each layer, and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer.


December 12, 2016


3. After deep areas have been filled to same depth as remaining joints, point joints by placing mortar

in layers not greater than 3/8 inch. Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing masonry units have worn or rounded edges, slightly recess finished mortar surface below face of masonry to avoid widened joint faces. Take care not to spread mortar beyond joint edges onto exposed masonry surfaces or to featheredge the mortar.

4. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints as demonstrated in approved mockup. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing.

5. Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive hours, including weekends and holidays.

6. Hairline cracking within mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is unacceptable. Completely remove such mortar and repoint.

F. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry, allow mortar to harden at least 30 days before beginning cleaning work.

3.3 FINAL CLEANING

A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, applied by low pressure spray.

1. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes.2. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.



December 12, 2016

UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.



B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315.


A. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for mockups.

1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 60 inches long b tallest wall height by full thickness.


A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.


December 12, 2016


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work and will be within 20 feet vertically and horizontally of a walking surface.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

2.3 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

B. Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Seat Wall: Endicott Clay Products, Medium Ironspot 46 Velour Modular.or comparable product by one of the following:

1) Yankee Hill Brick, Medium Iron Spot, Velour, Modular

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.



D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.


December 12, 2016


E. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.

F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.

G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

H. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as pointing mortar for glazed or pre-faced masonry units (and approved for such use by manufacturer of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's colors.

I. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

J. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Exterior Walls: Stainless steel.2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch diameter.3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.187-inch diameter.4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.187-inch diameter.5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet.

C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.

D. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:

1. Ladder type with one side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches wide, plus one side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches wide or less.

2. Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through facing wythe, but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

3. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum horizontal play of 1/16 inch and maximum vertical adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.


December 12, 2016


2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.

2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows:

1. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

2. Fabricate metal sealant stops from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

3. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from stainless steel to shapes indicated.

B. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.2. Use portland cement-lime masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime masonry cement mortar.4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime masonry cement mortar.5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view,

regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.


December 12, 2016


B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M or S.2. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior

load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

E. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

3.2 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:


December 12, 2016


1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

E. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not

grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.


December 12, 2016


C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to concrete and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Fasten anchors to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

2. Embed in masonry joints.3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down.4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c.

horizontally, with not less than one anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter.

5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 25 inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than one anchor for each 3.5 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter.

6. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and horizontally. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 24 inches, around perimeter.

3.6 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls.3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12

inches beyond openings.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.7 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:


December 12, 2016


1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and through inner wythe to within 1/2 inch of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior face of wall is to receive furring or framing, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn flashing up approximately 2 inches on interior face.

3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.

4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

C. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing.

D. Install cavity vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated.

1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.

3.8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.

D. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength.


December 12, 2016


E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for compressive strength.

H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes.

3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner.4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing

surfaces thoroughly with clear water.5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

B. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



December 12, 2016

DECORATIVE METAL REPAIR 050170.61 - 1

SECTION 050170.61 - DECORATIVE METAL REPAIR

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.

B. Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.

C. High-Pressure Spray: 800 to 1200 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Pack, deliver, and store decorative metal items in suitable packs, heavy-duty cartons, or wooden crates; surround with sufficient packing material to ensure that products are not deformed, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

B. Store decorative metal inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

C. Protect strippable protective covering on decorative metal from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of decorative metal installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


December 12, 2016


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Comply with each manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. Prevent chemical solutions from coming into contact with people, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact.

1. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proved to resist chemical solutions being used unless products being used will not damage adjacent surfaces. Use protective materials that are waterproof and UV resistant. Apply masking agents to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive staining.

2. Do not apply chemical solutions during winds of enough force to spread them to unprotected surfaces.

3. Neutralize alkaline and acid wastes before disposal.4. Dispose of runoff from operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion,

undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.

3.2 DECORATIVE METAL REPAIR, GENERAL

A. Repair Appearance Standard: Repaired surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as viewed from 5 feet away by Architect.

B. Execution of the Work: In repairing items, disturb remaining existing work as minimally as possible and as follows:

1. Stabilize decorative metal to reestablish structural integrity and weather resistance while maintaining the existing form of each item.

2. Remove deteriorated coatings and corrosion.3. Sequence work to minimize time before protective coatings are reapplied.4. Repair items where stabilization is insufficient to stop progress of deterioration.5. Repair items in place where possible.6. Replace or reproduce items where indicated or scheduled.7. Install temporary protective measures to stabilize decorative metal that is indicated to be repaired

later.

C. Mechanical Coating Removal: Use gentle methods, such as scraping and wire brushing, that will not abrade metal substrate.

D. Repair Decorative Metal Item: Match existing materials and features.

1. Repair decorative metals by patching, piecing-in, splicing, or otherwise reinforcing metals with new metal matching existing metal.

E. Replace Decorative Metal Component: Where indicated, duplicate and replace items with new metal matching existing metal.

1. Replace heavily deteriorated or missing parts or features of decorative metal with compatible materials, using surviving prototypes to create patterns or molds for duplicate replacements.


December 12, 2016




December 12, 2016

DECORATIVE METAL REFINISHING 050170.63 - 1

SECTION 050170.63 - DECORATIVE METAL REFINISHING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes refinishing bare decorative metal surfaces as follows:

1. Removing metal for shop refinishing; reinstalling refinished metal.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.

B. Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.

C. High-Pressure Spray: 800 to 1200 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.


A. Decorative Metal Refinishing Specialist Qualifications: A qualified decorative metal refinishing specialist.

B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of decorative metal refinishing processes on existing surfaces to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Prepare mockups so they are inconspicuous.

1. Repairing Decorative Metal Finish: Repair finish of decorative fountain railing posts and historic fountain.


A. Pack, deliver, and store decorative metal items in suitable packs, heavy-duty cartons, or wooden crates; surround with sufficient packing material to ensure that products are not deformed, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

B. Store decorative metal inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

C. Protect strippable protective covering on decorative metal from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of decorative metal installation.


December 12, 2016


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PREPARATORY CLEANING MATERIALS

A. Abrasive Materials:

1. Abrasives for Ferrous Metal Cleaning: Aluminum oxide paper, emery paper, fine steel wool, steel scrapers, and steel-wire brushes of various sizes.

2.2 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DECORATIVE METAL REFINISHING SPECIALIST

A. Decorative Metal Refinishing Specialist Firms: Subject to compliance with requirements, firms that may provide decorative metal refinishing include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Robinson Iron: 1856 Robinson Rd, Alexander City, Alabama 35011; (256)-329-8486

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Comply with each manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. Prevent chemical solutions from coming into contact with people, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact.

1. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proved to resist chemical solutions being used unless products being used will not damage adjacent surfaces. Use protective materials that are waterproof and UV resistant. Apply masking agents to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive staining.

2. Do not apply chemical solutions during winds of enough force to spread them to unprotected surfaces.

3. Neutralize alkaline and acid wastes before disposal.4. Dispose of runoff from operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion,

undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.

3.3 DECORATIVE METAL REFINISHING, GENERAL

A. Refinishing Appearance Standard: Refinished surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as viewed from 5 feet away by Architect.


December 12, 2016


B. Execution of the Work: In refinishing items, disturb remaining existing work as minimally as possible and as follows:

1. Remove dirt and corrosion.2. Sequence work to minimize time before protective coatings are reapplied.3. Refinish items off-site and according to required appearance.

C. Refinish Decorative Metal Item: Remove existing metal finishes on item unless otherwise indicated and reapply them.

D. Repair Finish of Decorative Metal Item: Restore areas of deteriorated or missing finish on item and blend restored finish with existing, adjacent finish, including integral polished and patinated finishes.

3.4 PREPARATORY CLEANING

A. General: Use those methods indicated for each type of decorative metal and its location.

1. Brushes: If using wire brushes, use brushes of same base metal composition as metal being treated. Use brushes that are resistant to chemicals being used.

2. Spray Equipment: Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure indicated, measured at nozzle. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that spray methods do not damage surfaces.

B. Nonacidic Liquid Chemical Cleaning: Apply chemical cleaner to surfaces according to chemical-cleaner manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Ferrous Metals: Do not rinse ferrous metals with water; neutralize chemical cleaner on ferrous metals as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Dry immediately with clean soft cloths. Follow direction of grain in metal.

3.5 REMOVAL, REPAIR, AND REINSTALLATION

A. General: Perform removal, repair, and reinstallation work as required in Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" and Section 050170.61 "Decorative Metal Repair."



December 12, 2016

DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 - 1

SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel and iron decorative railings.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

B. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill area, and anchorage system components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Steel and Iron Decorative Railings:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Architectural Iron Designs, Inc.b. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc.c. Wiemann Metalcraft.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1571&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd&mf=&src=wd





December 12, 2016


d. Wagner Collaborative Metal Works

B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.

B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:type

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2.3 METALS, GENERAL

A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 STEEL AND IRON

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M (cold formed) ASTM A 513.

B. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.

C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Uncoated Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating where concealed; Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners where exposed.

2. Galvanized-Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.

3. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.


December 12, 2016


B. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193[ or ICC-ES AC308].

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or

ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy [Group 1] [Group 2]

stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with

B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.

C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

1. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds; no evidence of a welded joint.

D. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

E. Form changes in direction by bending.

F. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

G. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.

I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Preparing Nongalvanized Items for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."


December 12, 2016


B. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of

steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

D. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

E. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.



December 12, 2016

SLATE ROOFING REPAIR 073126 - 1

073126 SLATE ROOFING REPAIR

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This procedure provides supplemental guidelines to be used when specifying repair or replacement work on slate roofs. Guidelines for qualification, materials, fabrication and general guidelines for installation are included.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and recommendations for each type of roofing product required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. Submit three samples of slates. Submit samples of nails, rag felt and plastic cement.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide primary products, produced by a single manufacturer, which has produced that type product successfully for not less than 3 years. Provide secondary products only as recommended by manufacturer of primary products for use with roofing system specified.

B. Installer Qualifications: A single Installer ("Roofer") shall perform the work of this section; and shall be a firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in installation of slate shingle roofs similar to those required for this project and which is acceptable to or licensed by the manufacturer of primary roofing material.

1. Installer Certification: Obtain written certification from manufacturer certifying that installer is approved by manufacturer for installation of specified roofing system. Provide copy of certification to Contracting Officer prior to award of roofing work.

2. Installer's Field Supervision: Installer must maintain full-time supervisor/foreperson on jobsite during times that roofing work is in progress. Supervisor must have minimum of 5 years experience in roofing work similar to nature and scope of specified roofing.

3. Provide detailed written resume of slate installer's qualifications including at least 5 examples of quality slate installations.

C. Pre-Application Roofing Conference: Approximately two weeks prior to scheduled commencement of slate shingle installation and associated work, meet at project site with Installer, installer of each component of associated work, other work in and around roofing which must precede or follow roofing work, the Contracting Officer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of the work including (where applicable), test agencies, and governing authorities. Record (Contractor) discussions of conference and decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work, including but not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks), inspect and discuss condition of substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

2. Review roofing system requirements (drawings, specifications and other contract documents).3. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed.


December 12, 2016


4. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

5. Review required inspection, testing, certifying and materials usage accounting procedures.6. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable

conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing (if not a mandatory requirement)

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store in a dry, well ventilated, weather-tight place. Unless protected from weather or other moisture sources, do not leave unused felts on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on end on pallets or other raised surface. Handle and store materials or equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent deflection of deck.

B. Felt rolls and shingles which are stored on roof overnight shall be covered with tarpaulins, not plastic. Coverage shall be complete, with tarpaulins extending to bottom to prevent exposure in wind. Material shall be stored in such a manner so as not to exceed 20 PSF loading on roof.

1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS\

A. Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements.

B. Temporary Protection: Contractor shall be responsible for protection of spaces and contents below roof deck from water leakage. Roof deck shall never be left exposed overnight or during inclement weather.

C. The contractor shall be responsible for protection of spaces and contents below roof deck from water leakage. Roof decks or insulation shall never be left exposed overnight or during inclement weather.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit, before installation, certification from the producer of slate shingles that the Contractor has undergone training in the application of these shingles by the producer.

B. The Contractor shall provide a two-year warranty against leaks, faulty material and workmanship.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Reference: ASTM C406/C406M -10 Standard Specification of Roofing Slate

B. Material and Workmanship: Slate shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Unless otherwise specified, surfaces shall be of reasonably smooth cleavage.2. Slate shall be free from knots or knurls that would lessen the durability or weather tightness of the

finished work.3. Unless otherwise specified, slate shall be rectangular, with straight cut edges.


December 12, 2016


4. Unless otherwise specified, corners shall be reasonably full on exposed edges, with no broken corners on covered ends that would diminish the nailing strength or weather tightness.

5. Unless otherwise specified, the thickness shall be approximately three-eighth inch.6. Flatness - The maximum bend shall not exceed one- eighth inch in 12 inches.7. Unless otherwise specified, holes shall be machine- punched for 3-inch double lap.

C. General Requirements:

1. Slate shall be whole and clean. Not more than 2 percent of broken slate will be accepted.2. All slate shall be hard, dense, sound rock, punched for two nails each. No cracked slate shall be

used. All exposed corners shall be practically full. No broken corners on covered ends which sacrifice nailing strength or the laying of a water-tight roof will be allowed.

D. Detail Requirements:

1. Color: To match existing or original and as approved by Architect.2. Strength: The average modulus of rupture across the grain shall not be lower than 9,000 pounds

per square inch.3. Absorption: The maximum absorption shall be - ASTM Grade S1--0.08%4. Acid Resistance: The slate shall, under the acid test, show no softening to an average depth

greater than - ASTM Grade S1 -- 0.002 inch.

E. Methods of Sampling, Inspection and Tests:

1. The inspection of the slate may be made at the discretion of the Owner either before or after delivery.

2. Samples for test, when required, shall be selected by the Inspector and shall be representative of the material. At least one sample of slate shall be selected from each carload or fraction thereof. Additional samples may be taken for test at any time or place at the discretion of the Owner.

3. Absorption Test: The specimen shall consist of a square or rectangular slab not less than 4 inches on any side, cut from the slate shingle so that the saw cut is nowhere nearer than 1 inch to the sheared edge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive slate shingles and associated work and conditions under which roofing will be installed. Do not proceed with roofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

1. Verify that flatness and fastening of wood roof decks are securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no adjacent units in excess of 1/16-inch out of plane. Pull out or drive home projecting fasteners.

B. Condition of Surfaces: Decks to which roofing system is to be applied shall be sound and dry, clean, smooth and free from projections. Application of roof system components shall not progress when there is ice, frost, surface moisture, or dampness, visible on the roof deck. Deck shall be thoroughly broomed clean, including within flutes.

C. Replace any boards of the wood roof deck if shown to be weak structurally, rotted, splintered or broken with treated boards.


December 12, 2016


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Roof removal is to commence in the center of areas to be removed and to proceed outward to the edge of the areas to be removed.

B. Any disintegrating, wet or failed material shall be removed and replaced.

C. Removed roofing, insulation, flashing and masonry will be removed from the roof immediately without allowing accumulation of piles of trash. Tossing of any trash, tools or any objects from roof to any areas below, including from one roof level to another, is expressly prohibited.

D. Removed materials shall become the property of Contractor and shall be removed from the site. Debris and scrap shall be removed from the work area daily.

E. Temporary Roof Installation:

1. If adverse weather conditions require protection of exposed deck, install 6 mil polyethylene sheets horizontally, shingling, from top to bottom. Staple and tape all joints and edges.

2. Remove temporary roof completely prior to installation of permanent roofing system



December 12, 2016

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.2. Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.





B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.2. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.3. Include identification of finish for each item.4. Include pattern of seams and details of termination points, expansion joints and expansion-joint

covers, direction of expansion, roof-penetration flashing, and connections to adjoining work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Product certificates.

B. Product test reports.

C. Sample warranty.


A. Maintenance data.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.


December 12, 2016


B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 , alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. AAMA2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated.


December 12, 2016


B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; CCW WIP 300HT.b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; Grace Ice and Water Shield

HTGrace Vycor Butyl Self-Adhered FlashingGrace Vycor Plus Self-Adhered FlashingGrace Vycor V40 Self-Adhered FlashingUltra.

c.

2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher.

3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or lower.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze or passivated Series 300 stainless steel.3. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.4. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.5. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Series 300

stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with

release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide

and 1/8 inch thick.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polysulfide silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=5148&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123457031871&mf=04&src=wd



December 12, 2016


F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and

tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on

faces exposed to view.

B. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

H. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

2.6 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other

accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.


December 12, 2016


1. Accessories: Continuous, removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and hardware cloth screen Wire-ball downspout strainer Valley baffles.

B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors. Shop fabricate elbows.

1. Fabricate from the following materials:

a. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

2.7 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Apron, Step, Cricket, and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

B. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of

not less than 2 inches .


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.


December 12, 2016


2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints

at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for

nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.

3.3 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.

B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.

1. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for cleaning gutters.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed

to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.

D. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated. Lap

joints minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate.


December 12, 2016


C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert

counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches .

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.



December 12, 2016

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with faces.2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


A. Product Data: For each type of door.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.4. Undercuts.5. Requirements for veneer matching.6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.


A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program or is a licensee of WI's Certified Compliance Program.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.2. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.3. Mohawk Doors; a Masonite company.4. VT Industries, Inc.







December 12, 2016


2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:

1. Extra Heavy Duty: public toilets.

2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors :

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces .

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.5 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on edges of cutouts, and mortises.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.


December 12, 2016


D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.



December 12, 2016

STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 1

SECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exterior stile and rail wood doors and sidelites.2. Priming stile and rail wood doors.



B. Shop Drawings: For stile and rail wood doors. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and other pertinent data.

C. Samples: Represent typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish Sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.


A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other requirements specified. Assemble exterior doors and sidelites with wet-use adhesives.

2.2 EXTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS

A. Thermal Transmittance: Maximum whole fenestration product U-factor of 0.30, according to AAMA 1503, ASTM E 1423, or NFRC 100.

B. Exterior Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Exterior doors complying with WDMA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors," and with other requirements specified.


December 12, 2016


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

C. Exterior Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Exterior custom doors complying with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards," and with other requirements specified.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide VT Industries; Artistry, Exterior Raised Panel Non-Rated Four Panel Door, SS1041A or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Artistic Doors and Windows, Inc.b. Belentry Doors LLC.c. Dimension Millworks.d. Eggers Industries.e. Enjo Architectural Millwork.f. Harring Doors.g. Maiman Company (The).h. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc.i. Pinecrest Inc.j. Select Door.k. Sun-Dor-Co.l. Woodtech Trading Company.

3. Grade: AWS, Section 9, premium grade.4. Finish: Opaque.5. Design:

a. Panel type: Raisedb. Door Top: Squarec. Top Panel: Square

6. Door Construction for Opaque Finish:

a. Stile and Rail Construction: Solid Hardwood.b. Raised-Panel Construction: Solid Hardwood

c. Raised-Panel Thickness: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 1-5/8 inches.

7. Glass: Uncoated, clear, insulating-glass units made from two lites of 3.0-mm-thick, fully tempered

glass with 1/4-inch interspace.

2.3 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Stile Edge: Matching hardwood stile edge.

B. Inner Stile and Rail:

1. Specified wood veneer pressed over structural composite lumber.

C. Panels:
















December 12, 2016


1. Mitered rim banded panels.2. Center balanced, book match.

D. Stile and Rail Joints: Doweled construction.

E. Hinges and Face Plates: Factory drill pilot holes.

2.4 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICATION

A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for field fitting.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction.

D. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water-repellent preservative to comply with WDMA I.S.4. Flash top of outswinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal flashing.

2.5 SHOP PRIMING

A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."

B. Factory Finish: AWS System 2, lacquer, precatalized.

1. Stain coat.

2. Sealer Coat

3. Sanding: Sand.

4. Topcoat: 2 coats.

C. Top and bottom rails: Factory Sealed.

2.6 FINISHING

A. Finish wood doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish.

B. For doors indicated to be factory finished, comply with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards," and with other requirements specified.


December 12, 2016


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.



December 12, 2016

RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 1

SECTION 096723 - RESINOUS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes resinous flooring systems.





B. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.


A. Material certificates.

B. Material test reports.




A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application.

B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application.

C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.


December 12, 2016


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Flammability: Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635.

2.2 RESINOUS FLOORING

A. Resinous Flooring System: Abrasion-, impact-, and chemical-resistant, aggregate-filled, and resin-based monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor and integral cove base.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dur-a-flex: "Dur-a-quartz floor system" or comparable product by one of the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc.; BASF Building Systems.b. Dur-A-Flex, Inc.c. International Coatings Inc.

B. System Characteristics:

1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.2. Wearing Surface: Manufacturer's standard wearing surface .

3. Overall System Thickness: 1/8 inch .

C. Primer: Type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer for substrate and resinous flooring system indicated.

D. System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum physical property requirements when tested according to test methods indicated:

1. Compressive Strength: 12,500 psi minimum according to ASTM C 579.2. Tensile Strength: 2,600 psi minimum according to ASTM C 307.3. Water Absorption:0.04 percent maximum according to ASTM D- 570.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring application.

B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring.

1. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing.

C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.






December 12, 2016


3.2 APPLICATION

A. Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.

1. Expansion and Isolation Joint Treatment: At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Primer: Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. Round internal and external corners.

1. Integral Cove Base: 4 inches high.

D. Troweled or Screeded Body Coats: Apply troweled or screeded body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or power trowel and grout to fill voids. When body coats are cured, remove trowel marks and roughness using method recommended by manufacturer.

E. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period.



December 12, 2016

EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates:

1. Steel and iron.2. Wood.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.


December 12, 2016


2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:1. Benjamin Moore & Co.2. Duron, Inc.3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the Exterior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

1. Ten percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.2. Wood: 15 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.







December 12, 2016


D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel and Iron Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI EXTMPI EXT 5.1C:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal, MPI#79.b. Topcoat: (2 coats) Acrylic exterior, water based, semi-gloss, MPI#153.

B. Wood Substrates: Wood trim, Architectural woodwork and Wood board ceiling and siding .

1. Latex over Latex Primer System MPI EXT6.3L:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex for exterior wood, MPI#6.b. Topcoat: (2 Coats) Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI#11.



December 12, 2016

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Concrete.2. Clay masonry.3. Steel and iron.4. Wood.5. Gypsum board.6. Plaster.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.


December 12, 2016



A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.2. Duron, Inc.3. Glidden Professional.4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.5. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.








December 12, 2016


3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.2. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.3. Wood: 15 percent.4. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

3.4 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Latex System MPI INTMPI INT 3.1A:


December 12, 2016


2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 3.1M:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC,MPI#149.b. Topcoat: (2) Coats, Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3),MP I

#145.

B. Steel Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT5.1S:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based MPI #107.b. Topcoat: (2 Coats) Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss

Level 5), MPI #147.

C. Wood Substrates: Wood trim Architectural woodwork and wood board paneling

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT6.3V:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.b. Topcoat: (2 Coats) Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss

Level 5),MPI #147.

D. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.2M:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC,MPI#149.b. Topcoat: (2 coats) Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3),MPI #145.



December 12, 2016

STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.15 - 1

SECTION 102113.15 - STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes stainless-steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures urinal screens.



B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.

C. Samples for each type of toilet compartment material indicated.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bradley Corporation, Series 700 or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.2. All American Metal Corp.3. American Sanitary Partition Corporation.4. Ampco, Inc.5. Flush Metal Partition Corp.6. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.7. Global Steel Products Corp.8. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.9. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.10. Marlite.













December 12, 2016


11. Metpar Corp.12. Shanahan's Limited.

C. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Floor and ceiling anchored.

D. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung flat panel.

E. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and-formed edge closures; corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections.

1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft

paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch for doors and panels and 1-

1/4 inches for pilasters.2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units

of size and material adequate for panel to withstand applied downward load on grab bar of at least

250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446, without deformation of panel.3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations

where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.

F. Urinal-Screen Construction:

1. Flat-Panel Urinal Screen: Matching panel construction.

G. Facing Sheets and Closures: Stainless-steel sheet of nominal thicknesses as follows:

1. Pilasters, Braced at Both Ends: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.038 inch.

2. Panels: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.031 inch.

3. Doors: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.031 inch.4. Flat-Panel Urinal Screens: Thickness matching the panels.

H. Pilaster Shoes Sleeves (Caps): Stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch nominal thickness and 3

inches high, finished to match hardware.

I. Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of material matching the thickness and construction of pilasters; with shoe and sleeve (cap) matching that on the pilaster.

J. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

K. Stainless-Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard textured finish on exposed faces. Protect exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment.

2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty stainless-steel operating hardware and accessories.

1. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.




December 12, 2016


B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel anchors compatible with related materials.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories and solid blocking within panel where required for attachment of toilet accessories.

B. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

C. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at tops and bottoms of posts. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at posts to conceal anchorage.

D. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide in-swinging doors for standard

toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch.

b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.

2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height brackets.

a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.


December 12, 2016




December 12, 2016

SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 1

SECTION 129300 - SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bollards.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BICYCLE RACKS (L2.6)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Dero Bike Rack C2. Huntco Supply, LLC3. Maglin Site Furniture, LLC4. Victor Stanley, Inc.

1.2 BOLLARDS (L2.6)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Robinson Iron2. A&T Iron Works, Inc.3. Reliance Foundry

B. MATERIALS

1. Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:

a. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A48/A 48M, Class 200.




December 12, 2016

SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed.

C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings.

D. Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.

E. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core-drill holes for installing posts in concrete to depth

recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with , mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.

F. Pipe Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.



December 12, 2016

EXTERIOR FOUNTAINS 131213 - 1

SECTION 131213 - EXTERIOR FOUNTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Fountain Tanks and Equipment

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 334100 Storm Utility Drainage Piping



1. Include construction details relative to materials, individual components and profiles and finishes.2. Manufacturer's technical literature with installation and storage instruction for each product

specified.3. Pumps: Pump performance curves indicated GPM vs TDH, maximum efficiency point and

maximum amperage draw, together with current characteristics and service factor of motor.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections and details.2. Indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, and location and size of each

field connection3. Include locations and connections for Pump Vault, Water Treatment Tank, Lighting and Controls.4. Details and sections through Fountain Heads shall be included.5. All Shop Drawings shall be certified and sealed by a Professional Engineer, registered in the state

in which the project is being submitted.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instruction for operation, maintenance and winterization.


A. Applicable requirements of the following Specification and Codes apply to work of this Section:

1. Local building and health codes.


December 12, 2016


2. American national Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:

a. ANSI/APSP-7 "American National Standard for Suction Entrapment Avoidance in Swimming Pools, Wading Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs and Catch Basins"

3. Plumbing Code IBC - Virginia USBC (2012 IPC)4. Electrical Code - Virginia USBC (references 2011 NEC)

B. All work under this Section must be performed by a Contractor experienced and regularly engaged in building exterior fountains. Contractors bidding this work must have completed five (5) projects within the past ten years equal to or larger than this project.

C. All work under this Section shall be inspected and installed in accordance with all current local and state codes and regulations.

1. The Fountain contractor shall obtain the following:

a. Electrical Inspection and Plumbing Inspection

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Faulty operation of controls and safety mechanisms.b. Deterioration or corrosion of metals or metal finishes.

2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

a.

2.2 EXTERIOR FOUNTAIN

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance iwth requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings by Roman Fountains or equal product.

1. Submit "or equal" per Section 012500 Substitution Procedures.

B. Fountain System Equipment List

1. 8” dia. Anti-Vortex Plate & Sump Assembly, heavy duty injection Molded ABS sump and integral waterstop flange with 2” (F) N.P.T. side and bottom connections with PVC male threaded plug for unused connection, 8” diameter natural finish brass antivortex plate, brass spacers and Allen head type S.S. vandal resistant safety fasteners.

a. Quantity: Two (2).


December 12, 2016


2. PVC Waterstop Fitting, Schedule 80 PVC pipe and sheet material, solvent welded waterstop. 2” slip connection.

a. Quantity: One (1).

3. Standpipe Overflow Drain, with cast bronze waterstop drain coupling with bonding screw, copper standpipe and bronze dome cap w/ S.S. set screws and 2" (F) N.P.T. outlet connection.


4. Adjustable, Combination Water Level/Low Level Cutoff Control, consists of a conduit-mount, height adjustable sensor housing constructed of brass with stainless steel fasteners and 3/4” (F) N.P.T. conduit connection. Unit features multi-level float-type sensor of brass and Buna-N construction with a 6” adjustability range and includes 100 ft. of pre-attached, 4-conductor, colorcoded sensor cable.


5. Slab Penetration, Schedule 40 red brass pipe body to ASTM-B16 brass waterstop, brass bonding screw and 3/4” (M) N.P.T. connections


6. Adjustable Inlet Fitting, machined cast bronze body and adjustable brass deflector plate with slots, polished finish (on exposed portion), integral waterstop flange with bonding screw and 1 1/2" (F) N.P.T. connection.

a. Quantity: Two (2).

7. Freestanding LED Submersible Light Fixture, ETL Listed, 12VDC, high output RGB LED diodes, stainless steel housing and fasteners, tempered glass lens, silicone lens gasket, chromed brass cord entrance fitting and 20 feet of 18 AWG SJOW cable.

a. Quantity: Four (4).

8. Submersible Junction Box, conduit mount, cast bronze construction with neoprene gasket, brass fasteners, (1) 1” (F) N.P.T. bottom power conduit connection, and four (4) 1/2” N.P.T. side connections with brass cord seal fittings (shipped loose, installed in field). Junction box is U.L. Listed, has a volume of 40.0 cubic inches and includes internal grounding lug.


9. Slab Penetration, Schedule 40 red brass pipe body to ASTM-B16 brass waterstop, brass bonding screw and 1” (M) N.P.T. connections.


10. Potting Compound, re-enterable electrical insulating compound, for use in RJB-Series junction boxes (required by NEC 680). 21.2 oz. size.


11. Series 1 Direct Burial Pump Vault, consisting of a 3’-5” sq. x 2’8” deep heavy duty FRP vault with white gel-coat interior and brown gel-coat exterior, furnished with 36” Sq. fiberglass reinforced plastic lid with stainless steel piano hinge attachment and lock hardware (lock by installer).


December 12, 2016


a. Containing:

1) RWSP-100; 2) 1 HP self-priming display pump with integral suction strainer; RCCF-050; 3) 50 sq. ft. cartridge filter unit; 4) RCUAG-Series “Copper-Silver” Ionizer; RMS-075-N; 5) 3/4" Fill Manifold; RSX33-F; 6) 1/3 HP Sump Pump; 7) Integral Floor Sump With 2” Floor Drain; 8) 3” vent connections with 105 CFM vent fan; 9) LED Power Supply; LED RGB DMX Driver. RPCP/RLCP; 10) U.L. 508 listed control panel, containing: 11) main disconnect; 12) pump starter with circuit breaker, contactor & adjustable, solid-state overload,

single channel programmable time switch(es), for pump and lights, 1500 watt lighting circuit with class ‘A’ G.F.C.I. breaker;

13) H.O.A. switch(es), and 14) water level/low level cutoff control circuit (when applicable). 15) All pre-wired in a Nema 4 enclosure. 16) Unit is factory engineered, assembled and tested prior to shipment.

b. Power requirement: 120/240 V., 1-phase. c. Quantity: One (1).

12. 3” PVC Vent Cap, Schedule 40 PVC construction and 1/4" stainless steel fasteners. Low profile corrosion resistant design.

a. Standard brown color. b. Quantity: Two (2).

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas in which work is to be performed. Report in writing to Owner's Representative all prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fountain system in accorance iwth manufacturers' instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

3.4 INSTALLATION PIPING

A. Cut all pipe with mechanical cutter without damage to pipe.


December 12, 2016


B. Placing and Laying: Inspect pipe for defects before installation. Clean the interior of pipe thoroughly of foreign matter and keep clean during laying operation. Pipe shall not be laid in water or when trench conditions are unacceptable as determined by the owner's Representative. Water shall be kept out of the trench until the pipe is installed. When work is not in progress, open end of pipe and fittings shall be securely closed so that no trench water, earth of other substance will enter the pipes or fittings.

C. Threaded Joints: After cutting and before threading, the pipe shall be reamed and shall have burrs removed. Screw joints shall be made with graphite or inert filter and oil or with an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Threads shall be full-cut and not more than 3 threads on the pipe shall remain exposed. Use Teflon tape on the male threads of all threaded pipe joints. Caulk of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks will not be permitted. Unions shall be provided where required for disconnection of exposed piping. Unions will be permitted where access is provided.

D. Solvent welded joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and the following minimum standards.

1. Fittings shall fit easily on the pipe before applying cement. The oter suface area of pipe and inner wall of fitting shall be dry and clean. Cleaner is to be applied to the other surface of the pipe and to the inner surface of the fitting. Cement is to be applied to the outer surface of the pipe or on the male section of fittings only. When the outside surface area of pipe is satisfactorily covered with cement, allow ten (10) seconds open time to elapse before inserting pipe end into fitting. After full insertion of pipe into fitting, turn fitting about the pipe end approximately 1/8 to 1/4 of turn. Wipe off excess cement at the joint in a neat cove bead.

2. Joints shall remain undisturbed for a minimum of 10 minutes from time of jointing the pipe and fitting. If necessary to apply pressure to a newly made joint, limit to 10% of rated ipe pressure, druing the first 24 hours after the joint has been made.

3. Full working pressure shall not be applied until the joints have set for a period of 24 hours.4. Make provisions for expansion and contraction by way of swing joints or snaking.5. Protect plastic pipe from exposure to aromatic hydro-carbons, halogenated hydro-carbons and

most esters and ketones that attack the material. Protect all pipe from mechanical damage and long exposure to sunlight during storage.

E. Install piping without cross connection or inter-connection between distributions supply for drinking purposes and the fountain that will permit a backflow of water into the potable water supply. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Equipment and pool fittings shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. At the completion of work the fittings, materials and equipment shall be thoroughly clean and adjusted for proper operation.

F. Filter Face Piping: Arrange to carry out operations of filtering backwashing and filter draining.

G. Valve identification: Label all valves.

H. Testing and Flushing:

1. Pressure Piping: After the pipe is laid, the joints completed, and the trench partially backfilled leaving joints exposed for examination, subject new lines to a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 50 pounds per square inch. Joints shall remain watertight under thsi pressure for a period of two hours.

2. Gravity Lines: a water test shall be applied to all gravity drain piping systems, either in their entirety or in sections. All openings shall be tightly plugged and each system filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. Water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under tests, for at least 15 minutes before the inspection starts. System shall be tight at all joints.

3. Flushing: Before the fountain system is placed in operation, flush all fountain system piping with water to remove foreign matter and debris in piping.


December 12, 2016


3.5 INSTALLATION- ELECTRICAL

A. General:

1. Install wiring in sealed conduits.2. Conceal conduit unless otherwise indicated. Arrange exposed conduit in neat, straight lines parallel

or perpendicular to other construction.3. Cut conduit to fit without forcing or bending. Remove burs and rough edges.4. Bend conduit to prevent damage and reduction of inside diameter. Do not place more than two 90

degree bends on single runs between accessible points.5. Install dielectric fittings on connections between dissimilar conduit types and seal with dielectric

thread compound.6. Seal open conduit ends to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and water.7. Do not use threadless connectors for conduit.8. Provide bushings where conduit enters boxes or fittings.9. Provide accessible covers at junctions, bends, and offsets on exposed conduit runs.10. Do not use threadless couplings or connectors on conduit in wet locations or where buried. Make

joints using tapered pipe threads sealed with Teflon tape of sealant. 11. Install conduit entering control panels at bottom of panel.

B. Underwater Junction Boxes:

1. Fill boxes with approved potting compound.2. Prior to installing potting compound, make final connections and perform required testing.

C. Wiring:

1. Remove moisture and debris from conduit prior to installation of wiring.2. Do not install damaged wiring.3. Make connections to equipment susceptible to vibration or noise using flexible watertight conduit.4. Use THWN stranded wire in conduits between fountain and control panel.5. Neatly group and distribute wiring.6. Use stranded copper wiring between with waterproof insulation between underwater equipment

and control panels.7. Seal conduits after wiring installation.8. Cover conduit exposed to moisture with watertight plastic and make joints using watertight fittings.

D. Equipment Identification:

1. Provide permanently engraved metal nameplate for each piece of equipment identifying manufacturer, type, size, capacity, horsepower, and other characteristics.

2. Provide valve tag for each valve providing information to correlate valve with outlet or fitting served.3. Install nameplates for gages and control device panels as indicated. Attach using stainless steel

screws.4. Provide flow direction arrow pipe bands on system piping.


A. Piping Tests:

1. Provide temporary piping, pumps, and gages required to conduct tests.2. Conduct tests before concealment of work and before coatings, wraps, and insulations are applied.3. Replace or repair components showing leakage. Repeat test until criteria are met.4. Do not subject components to test pressures greater than pressure rating of item.


December 12, 2016


5. Vent air from piping being tested.

B. Underground piping:

1. Pressurize in accordance with pipe manufacturers’ instructions, excluding drain system, to 75 psi prior to backfilling. Spot backfilling to anchor piping may be done prior to pressurizing.

2. Leave piping pressurized until backfilling, grading, planting, and concrete work in area of piping is completed.

3. Pressure underground drain piping beneath equipment space to 15 psi until backfilling and concrete work in area is completed.

C. Test as follows:

1. Conduct each test for minimum continuous duration of eight hours.2. Hydrostatically pressure test storm and sanitary drain piping at 15 psi.3. Hydrostatically pressure test other piping and equipment at 75 psi.4. Strike solder joints using soft-face hammer while under pressure.5. Log pressure readings for required tests at beginning and end of each test and on each working

day between. Note location and cause of any failures and method of repair. 6. Notify Architect prior to beginning testing.

3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING1. Make adjustments required for proper operation of system. Use manufacturer’s factory technicians

where adjustments cannot be accomplished by Contractor’s personnel.2. After installation, align pumps connected to motors by means of flexible couplings to within

tolerance limits recommended by equipment and coupling manufacturers.3. Prior to placing rotating equipment in service for operation or testing, lubricate using lubricants

recommended by manufacturer.

3.8 30-DAY OPERATING PERIOD1. Demonstrate thirty day, fully automated, uninterrupted daily operation of 8 to 16 hours prior to final

acceptance of system.2. Supervise operation of equipment and be responsible for proper operation.3. The costs of labor, electricity, water, and operational tools, equipment and supplies during the 30

day operation period shall be paid by the Contractor.4. Make adjustments and replace components as required to ensure proper operation.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION1. Demonstrate proper operation and maintenance of fountain system to Owner.



SANITARY SEWERAGE 221313 -1

SECTION 221313 – SANITARY SEWERAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes gravity-flow, nonpressure, outside the building, with the following components:1. Pipe and fittings.2. Cleanouts.3. Precast concrete and Cast-in-place concrete manholes.4. Manhole castings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer rubber.

B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Pipe and fittings.

2. Special fittings and couplings.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers. Include design calculations, and concrete design-mix report for cast-in-place manholes.

C. Field quality-control test reports with results of field testing.

1.5 PERMITTING REQUIREMENTSA. All materials, installation and testing shall comply with City of Richmond requirements. The Contractor shall review these specifications against the City of Richmond requirements at the time of construction and bring any conflicts immediately to the attention of the Engineer for resolution.


A. Do not store plastic pipe and fittings in direct sunlight.



B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.


A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

B. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.

C. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's written permission.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.

2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN 375) and smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

2.4 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Sleeve Materials:

1. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.2. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe

materials being joined.

2.5 PRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS

A. Reducing or transition, metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground pressure piping. Minimum pressure rating at least equal to the system operating pressure, but not less than 50 psig (345 kPa), and ends of same sizes as piping to be joined.

B. Tubular-Sleeve Couplings: AWWA C219, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners.



C. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard for type indicated.

D. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.

E. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

2.6 MANHOLES

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

1. Diameter: 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base

section, as required to prevent flotation.3. Base Section: 8-inch (200 mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 5-inch (125

mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having a base section with integral floor.

4. Riser Sections: 5-inch (125-mm) minimum wall thickness, constructed in increments of 12 inches (300 mm), and of length to provide depth indicated.

5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.

6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber.7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole

walls, for each pipe connection.8. Steps: ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel reinforcing rods

encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 48 inches.

9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

10. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover.

11. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7- to 9-inch (175- to 225-mm) riser with 4-inch (100-mm) minimum width flange and 26-inch (660-mm-) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER." Design for H-20 loading.

B. Cast-in-Place-Concrete Manholes: Construct of reinforced-concrete bottom, walls, and top; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (ASSHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated.

1. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete as required to prevent flotation.2. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole

walls, for each pipe connection.3. Steps: ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel reinforcing rods

encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 48 inches.



4. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

5. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225 mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover.

6. Retain subparagraph and associated subparagraphs below only if required. Buried manholes with risers to grade require manhole frames and covers only at the top of riser.

7. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7- to 9-inch (175- to 225-mm) riser with 4-inch (100-mm) minimum width flange and 26-inch (660-mm) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER." Design for H-20 loading.

8. Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 gray iron, unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.

1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa), deformed steel.

C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.

1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope per VDOT IS-1.

2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel per VDOT IS-1.3. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa)

minimum, with 0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.4. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.

2.8 CLEANOUTS

A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside caulk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. Use units with top-loading classifications according to the following applications: Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: same material as main line..



PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork."

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: See drawings for pipe materials. Where there is a conflict between the drawings and specifications, the drawings take precedence. Use the following pipe materials for each size range:

1. NPS 15 (DN 375) and smaller: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.

E. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

G. Install manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

H. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

I. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, jacking, or combination of both.

J. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:ntract Drawings.2. Install piping with 18-inch minimum cover.3. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.

K. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.



3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 INTERUPPTION OF SERVICE

A. Where sewer service to a single building is required to be interrupted coordinate the timing and duration of the interruption with the Owner.

B. Where sewer mains (serving more than one building) are required to be interrupted, bypass pumping will be provided. Pumps shall be sized for the maximum flow and continuously manned during duration of pumping.

3.5 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C. Construct cast-in-place manholes as indicated.

D. Install PE sheeting on earth where cast-in-place-concrete manholes are to be built.

E. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.

F. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 1-inch (25 mm) above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains, as indicated.

B. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over nonferrous piping and at outside edges of underground manholes.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate report for each system inspection.



2. Defects requiring correction include the following:a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between

structures.b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or

cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice.4. Submit separate report for each test.

5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the following:

a. Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal./inch of nominal pipe size per mile (4.6 L/millimeter of nominal pipe size per kilometer) of pipe, during 24-hour period.

b. Close openings in system and fill with water.c. Purge air and refill with water.d. Disconnect water supply.e. Test and inspect joints for leaks.f. Use test pressure of at least 10 psig (69 kPa).

6. Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Flush with potable water.



December 12, 2016

DRINKING FOUNTAINS 224713 - 1

SECTION 224713 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes drinking fountains and related components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRINKING FOUNTAINS

A. Drinking Fountains : Outdoor Pedestal Drinking Fountain with Bottle Filler and Pet Fountain.

1. Steel Drinking Fountains:

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Murdock, Barrier Free Outdoor Pedestal Bi-Level Drinking Fountain with Bottle Filler, GYV34-PF or comparable product by one of the following:

1) Elkay Manufacturing Co.2) Halsey Taylor.3) Murdock-Super Secur; a member of Morris Group International.

2. Standards:

a. Comply with ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4.b. Comply with NSF 61 Annex G.

3. Bubblers: Three, vandal resistant.

4. Control: Push button.5. Bottle filler and Pet Fountain

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=7527&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd





December 12, 2016


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Set pedestal drinking fountains on floor.

C. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.

D. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball or gate valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

H. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Install ball or gate shutoff valve on water supply to each fixture. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

D. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

3.4 CLEANING

A. After installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.

D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



December 12, 2016



SITEWORK PROCEDURES 310000 -1

SECTION 310000 - SITEWORK PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. General instruction for sitework.

1.2 SCOPE

A. Sitework shall include site preparation, earthwork, site improvements, and paving/surfacing.

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. General/Supplementary Conditions and Division 1.


A. Prior to beginning work, become thoroughly familiar with site conditions and all sections of the Division.

B. Thoroughly coordinate all sections of this Division.

C. Comply with all pertinent codes and regulations.

D. Perform all required tests in accordance with section requirements.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings, product data.

B. Releases.

C. Disinfection and bacteriological reports.

D. Pressure test logs.

E. Project Record Documents.

F. Operating and maintenance data.

1.6 PERMITS

A. Obtain required permits from appropriate authorities before sitework begins.

1.7 DUST CONTROL

A. Use all means necessary to control dust on and near the Work, and on and near all off-site borrow areas, if such dust is caused by the Contractor's operations during



performance of the work, or if resulting from the conditions in which the Contractor leaves the site.

B. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust from being a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and concurrent performance of other work on the site.

1.8 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC

A. Do not close or obstruct roadways without prior permits.

B. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private roadways.

C. Maintain designated temporary roadways, walkways and detours for vehicular and pedestrian traffic.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. In accordance with the provisions of the following sections of Division 31 Section “Earthwork.”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SITE INSPECTION

A. Prior to all work of this Division, carefully inspect the entire site and all features designated to be removed and to be preserved.

3.2 CLARIFICATION

A. The Drawings do not purport to show all features existing on the site. Before commencing any work in this Division, verify with the Engineer all features not clearly identified to be removed or to be preserved and any discrepancies not fully resolved.

3.3 PRIOR CONDITIONS INSPECTIONS

A. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where work may commence in accordance with the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all applicable portions of the referenced standards.

B. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner's Representative and do not proceed with work in non-conforming areas until all identified discrepancies have been fully resolved.

3.4 PROTECTION AND SAFETY

A. Verify all required protection devices are in place and operational.



B. Establish extent of sitework by area and elevations; designate and identify datum elevation.

C. Set required lines and levels.

D. Maintain bench marks, monuments and other reference points.

3.5 UTILITIES

A. Before starting excavation, establish location and extent of utilities occurring in work area and disconnect or arrange for the disconnection of all utility services designated to be removed, performing all such work in accordance with the requirements of the utility company, agency, or entity involved.

B. Maintain, re-route or extend as required, existing utility lines to remain which pass through work area in accordance with the requirements of the utility company, agency, or entity involved.

C. Preserve in operating condition all active utilities traversing the site and designated to remain.

D. Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation; cap, plug or seal such lines and identify at grade.

E. Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines, re-routed or extended, on Project Record Documents.

F. Notify the Owner's Representative immediately when active utilities are encountered which are not shown on Drawings. The work shall be adequately protected, supported or relocated as directed by the Engineer.

3.6 PROCEDURE

A. Provide sitework in accordance with lines and levels required for construction of the Work, including space for forms, bracing and shoring, foundation drainage systems, and to permit inspection.

3.7 EXCESS WATER CONTROL

A. Do not place, spread, or roll fill material during unfavorable weather conditions. Do not resume operations until moisture content and fill density are satisfactory.

B. Provide berms or channels to prevent run-off into sub-grade; promptly remove all water collecting in depressions.

C. Provide and maintain at all times during construction, ample means and devices with which to promptly remove and dispose of all water from every source entering the excavations. Dewater by means which will ensure dry excavations and the preservation of the final lines and grades of bottoms of excavations.

D. Filter excess water per the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, latest edition, Section 3.26.



3.8 SURPLUS MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus backfill materials from site, or as otherwise directed by Owner.

B. Leave stockpile areas completely free of all excess fill materials.

3.9 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS

A. Promptly remove cleared debris from site. Burning of debris on site is not permitted, unless permission is obtained from applicable regulatory authority.

B. Obtain permission, as required, from applicable regulatory authority for disposal of debris at waste disposal site.

C. Remove surplus equipment and tools from the site.



SITE CLEARING AND DEMOLITION 311000 - 1

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING AND DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Protecting existing trees to remain.2. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, and grass.3. Clearing and grubbing.4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, abandoning site utilities in place and removing

site utilities.7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.


1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities.

2. Division 31 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading.

3. Division 31 Section “Erosion and Sediment Control” for erosion and sediment control requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.

B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

1.3 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.



B. Record drawings, according to Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.

C. In accordance with requirements in the General Conditions “Shop Drawings”, submit: Materials list and product data for materials proposed for slope protection and erosion control.

D. Provide the Owner with copies of all correspondence related to coverage under the VSMP permit and a copy of the SWPPP as initially prepared.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

B. Applicable Reference Specifications

1. Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT) Road and Bridge Specifications, current edition, excluding items addressing method of payment.

2. Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook (VESCH), current edition.

C. Approved plans: At the beginning of the project, the Contractor will be given a set of drawings stamped by the Department of Conservation (DCR). The Contractor shall maintain these drawings in good condition at the job site at all times.

D. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Except where otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified, comply with applicable requirements and details of the VESCH prepared by the Virginia State Soil and Water Conservation Commission.

E. Erosion and sediment control measures (E&S) shall be established at the beginning of construction, prior to land disturbance in accordance with drawings, notes and details in accordance with VESCH Standards, and to the extent required by the regional representative of the Department of Conservation and Recreation. The E&S shall be maintained during the entire length of construction. The Specifications and Drawings are not represented as being comprehensive, but rather convey the intent to provide complete slope protection and erosion control for both the Owner's property and adjacent property and waters.

F. Prevent to the maximum extent practical any tracking of soil and mud onto public roads through the use of wash racks and other appropriate measures. Any soil or mud tracked onto public roads shall be promptly removed.

G. Contractor is responsible to provide and maintain slope protection and erosion controls to the satisfaction of the Owner, the regional representative of the DCR, as applicable.

H. Contractor shall schedule construction in a manner to best provide slope protection and erosion controls. Install grass slopes, ditches and other areas to be disturbed by construction at the earliest possible time during the construction sequence.

I. The Contractor is responsible for cleaning out and disposing of all construction related sediment in the drainage system, pond, parking areas and any area where sediment has accumulated through Substantial Completion of the construction project. In no event will the Contractor be relieved of E&S requirements until all erodable soils have been stabilized. Disposal shall be as directed by the Owner at the Contractor's expense.



J. Damage to a stream, other natural areas or wetland is herein defined as the addition of soil, rock and topsoil, whether deposited by poor construction practice, sedimentation, wind, or other means; vegetable matter such as whole trees or any part thereof, or remnants from burning or other clearing processes; waste construction materials such as concrete, broken pipe, etc.; waste from construction equipment or parts thereof, or any other additions which can be classified or detrimental to said areas.

K. Damage will be specified by the Owner, by actual site inspections. If it is determined that damage has been caused by the Contractor through negligence, carelessness, by intention, or other, the Contractor will act as directed by the Owner to correct said damage as quickly as possible and to take steps to prevent further damage. Damage correction will be at no cost to the Owner. The Owner reserves the right to independently hire damage correction services if the Contractor does not perform in a timely or complete manner. The cost of such independent services shall be deducted from the Contractor's payment(s) and fees.


A. Existing trees shall be protected during clearing and demolition. All work within the drip zone shall be minimized and conducted in a way to minimize impacts to existing tree roots. Prior to start of work, contact the Landscape Architect to review specific procedures.

B. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Throughout the duration of the project, provide temporary measures to limit short-term impacts of construction on the public including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Notify the community of construction progress and provide alerts of potential construction traffic peaks and other potential negative traffic impacts through the use of radio, dynamic/changeable message signs, the internet, and information distribution.

2. Coordinate construction operation hours and shifts to minimize peak period impacts on traffic.

3. Limit construction traffic from passing through the core of Williamsburg, neighborhoods, and the core campus area through the designation of allowed construction routes.

4. Limit construction traffic during special events and other high traffic generating activities.

5. Coordinate traffic impacts of construction with Owner.

D. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.



E. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated.

F. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

G. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Locate and clearly flag trees to remain and those trees to be removed and review with Owner prior to clearing. Allow at least one week for Owner review.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

D. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 EROSION CONTROL

A. Establish and maintain erosion control and slope protection work as required by the Drawings, Notes, Details, and Specifications.

B. Remove all temporary erosion control systems at the completion of the Project when directed by the Owner. Clean sediment from all temporary and permanent erosion control facilities and the storm drainage system. Dispose of all material legally, off-site at Contractor's expense.

3.3 UTILITIES

A. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor.

B. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

C. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.

D. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.

E. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

F. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

G. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.



H. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

I. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.

2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.

3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade.

4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone.5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm), and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm).2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones.3. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove utility vaults entirely.

C. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.



3.7 DISPOSAL

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities.



EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 311100 - 1

SECTION 311100 - EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED:

A. All measures required to control erosion and sediment on the project site and on areas beyond the project limits, affected by the project.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, Latest Edition.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. All material shall comply with the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, Latest Edition, except where the drawings provide additional information or indicate specific options. No submittals are required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Materials shall be in accordance with the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, local ordinances, and Virginia Department of Transportation Standards where indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The erosion and sediment control measures shall protect adjacent properties, shall be in accordance with the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and local ordinances, and shall be approved by the Engineer. All measures shall be sized and designed in accordance with the criteria specified in the handbook. All erosion control measures shall be placed prior to commencement of grading.

B. Responsible Land Disturber (RLD): Prior to construction the Contractor must name the person identified as the Responsible Land Disturber (RLD) who will be in charge of and responsible for carrying out the land disturbing activities associated with this project. The person must meet the applicable requirements of Virginia Code Section 10.0-583 and 10.1-566.

C. Temporary measures shall be applied throughout the construction of the project to control erosion and to minimize siltation of drainage ditches, storm drains and waterways. The Contractor, as a minimum, shall employ all erosion control measures indicated on the drawings and specified herein.



D. Limit grading to areas of workable size so as to limit the duration of exposure of disturbed and unprotected area. All appropriate conservation practices should be applied in sequence of work. Disturbed areas that are to be left unfinished for more than 30 days shall be seeded temporarily.

E. Protect stockpiling material with mulch, temporary vegetation, or sediment barrier at base. Slopes of stockpiled material shall not exceed 2 to 1.

F. Stabilize all streets and parking areas, within 15 days of final grading, with base coarse-crushed stone.

G. Allow no water to enter the storm drainage system prior to settlement or screening of excess siltation.

H. No more than 200 feet of trench shall be open at any one time.

I. Synthetic filter fabric fencing shall be used for sediment control when land disturbing activities are within 25 feet of a live creek or stream.

J. No excavated material shall be placed in stream beds.

3.2 MINIMUM REQUIRED MEASURES

A. The measures indicated on the drawings shall be employed as a minimum. The Contractor shall provide additional measures as required by construction phasing and the City E&S inspector.

3.3 VIRGINIA STORMWATER MANAGEMENT PROGRAM (VSMP)

A. The project is located in a City combined sewer area, therefore a VSMP permit is not required. A Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan is also not required.

3.4 BMP INSTALLATION

A. Contributing drainage areas to BMPs (bioswales and permeable pavement) must be protected from sediment, see applicable sections..

3.5 MAINTENANCE

A. Inspect and maintain all control measures following each storm event, and at least weekly. Remove accumulated sediment as required. Repair any damage or deteriorated condition immediately.

3.6 REMOVAL

B. The Remove all control measures at the completion of the work and restore site as required.

3.7 FAILURE TO EXECUTE

C. The In the event the Contractor repeatedly fails to satisfactorily control erosion and siltation, the Owner reserves the right to employ outside assistance or to use his own



forces to provide the erosion control measures indicated and specified. The cost of such work, plus related engineering costs, will be deducted from monies due to the Contractor for other work.



EARTHWORK 312000 - 1

SECTION 312000 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. General site excavation, filling, and backfilling.

B. Excavation and backfilling for site structures, and roadways.

C. Excavation and backfilling for utilities.

D. Finish grading.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 31 Section “Erosion and Sediment Control”

B. Division 31 Section “Water Distribution”

C. Division 22 Section “Sanitary Sewerage“

D. Division 33 Section “Storm Drainage”

E. Division 32 Section “Lawns and Grass”

1.3 REGULATIONS

A. Comply with all codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work.

B. Work within existing or proposed Virginia State Rights-of-Way shall meet all requirements of the Virginia Department of Transportation.

C. Work within City of Richmond right-of-way and sidewalks adjacent to the City right-of-way shall comply with all requirements of the City of Richmond..

1.4 SUBMITTALS

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the following proposed materials to be used on the project:

A. Engineered Fill Materials

B. Granular Material (Bedding)

C. Aggregate Backfill Material

D. Geotechnical Fabric

E. One pound sample of any topsoil provided from off-site sources.



1.5 REFERENCES

A. Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT) Road and Bridge Specifications, latest edition.

B. American Society of Testing Methods (ASTM)

1.6 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND RECORDS

A. The Contractor shall examine the site, the Drawings, and records of existing subsurface soil conditions for the project available through the Engineer to determine the conditions under which the work will be performed. The Contractor shall formulate his own conclusions as to the subsurface conditions and shall remove all materials to the design subgrades indicated or hereinafter specified.

B. Subsurface soil investigation data, including records of test borings are made available for information only and are not guaranteed to represent all subsurface conditions that will be encountered. Additional test borings or other exploratory operations may be made by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

1.7 PROTECTION OF UTILITIES

A. The location of existing utilities, including underground utilities, is indicated on the drawings insofar as their existence and location were known at the time of preparation of the drawings. However, nothing in these Contract Documents shall be construed as a guarantee that such utilities are in the location indicated or that they actually exist, or that other utilities are not within the area of operations. The Contractor shall make all necessary investigations to determine the existence and locations of such utilities.

B. The Contractor shall contact “Miss Utility” (1-800-552-7001) at least three (3) working days in advance of planned work.

C. Report any uncharted or incorrectly charted lines to the Engineer for further direction.

D. Protect all existing service lines and related structures encountered in the excavation work. Where such lines and structures have been undermined due to the excavation work, provide suitable supports. If damaged, repair such lines or structures or arrange for their repair with the proper authorities of companies. The Contractor shall pay for any damage to and for maintenance and protection of existing utilities and structures.

1.8 PROTECTION OF TREES

A. Protect all trees which are indicated on the Drawings to remain or to be relocated..

B. Excavating or extensive grading shall not be performed under such trees within the spread of the branches. If excavation under such trees is necessary, and is approved, roots which are over 1 inch in diameter shall not be cut. Where branches of such trees are removed to facilitate construction, or the trees are inadvertently damaged, all damage to such trees shall be repaired by persons skilled in the care of trees.



1.9 PRECAUTIONS

A. The Contractor shall take every precaution to guard against any movement or settlement of existing or new construction, utilities, paving, walks, light standards, piping, conduit, etc., and shall provide at his own expense, all sheet piling, bracing or shoring necessary in connection therewith. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the design, and adequacy of any sheet piling, bracing and shoring required.

1.10 SHEETING AND SHORING

A. Sheeting and shoring shall be furnished in accordance with the provisions of VOSHA and as necessary to construct and protect the excavation, existing utilities, structures of all types, and as necessary for the safety of the employees.

B. Sheeting shall not be removed except when such removal will not result in damage to the work or the adjacent property. Sheeting left in place shall be cut off 18 inches below the existing ground surface, and shall be dimensionally located on the set of contract drawings provided by the Contractor showing "Drawing of Record."

1.11 PROTECTION OF UTILITIES IN FILL AREAS

A. New underground utilities shall not be laid in areas of fill prior to the actual performance of the grading operation, unless the depth of the cover over such utilities below existing ground surface is at least 14 inches for steel or ductile iron pipe and 30 inches for pipes of other materials. Such depth of cover requirements may be reduced provided the pipe is protected by concrete encasement or other manner satisfactory to the Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TOPSOIL

A. On-site surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying

subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials.

B. Off-site surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles meeting gradation requirements of a sandy loam with a least 5% organic material., maximum particle size of 6.0 mm, and, pH range of 6.0 – 7.5.

2.2 SUITABLE MATERIAL

A. General Fill: General Fill material shall be deemed as material that classifies in the ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups SC, GC, GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols. The maximum particle size shall be three inches largest dimension, except in the uppermost lift of fill, where the maximum particle size shall be two inches largest dimension. Maximum sized particles shall not be in excess of 20 percent of the volume of fill material, and such particles shall be well distributed throughout the mass.

B. Fill layers in lawn areas up to 6” shall be topsoil as defined above.



2.3 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL

A. Material not meeting the above requirements, including material such as clay mass, frozen materials, cinders, ashes, refuse, and vegetable or organic material shall be construed as unsuitable fill material.

B. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups MH, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols.

C. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 3 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

2.4 APPROVED GRANULAR MATERIAL

A. Approved granular material shall be well graded crushed stone conforming to Size No. 57 as specified in Section 203 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications.

2.5 APPROVED AGGREGATE BACKFILL MATERIAL

A. Aggregate backfill material shall be VDOT No. 21B as specified in Section 208 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications.

2.6 SEPARATION FABRIC

A. Separation fabric shall be a non-woven, polypropylene fabric meeting the requirements of Mirafi 140N.

2.7 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS

A. All excavated materials shall be unclassified, and shall be included in the lump sum price.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DEMOLITION, CLEARING, AND PREPARATION

A. Existing trees shall be protected during demolition and soil stripping operations, See Division 31 Section “Site Clearing and Demolition” for additional requirements.

B. All clearing and demolition material shall be completely removed from the site, and disposed of by the Contractor, at his expense.

C. Topsoil shall be carefully stripped to its full depth from all areas to be built upon. In lawn areas where the fill material is topsoil, the existing topsoil shall remain, but the existing sod shall be removed as long as tree root are not impacted. Stripped topsoil shall be stored and protected for reuse later.

D. Topsoil, all vegetation, such as roots, brush, heavy sods, heavy growth of grass, and all decayed vegetable matter, rubbish and other debris within the area upon which fill is to be



placed, shall be stripped or otherwise removed before the fill is started, except as noted above. In no case will such objectionable material be allowed to remain in or under the fill area.

E. Sloped ground surfaces steeper than one vertical to four horizontal on which fill is to be placed shall be plowed, stepped, benched, or broken up in such manner that fill material will bond with the existing surface, as directed. Before starting the fill, the area shall be proofrolled and approved by the Engineers quality control representative. Any soft, pumping, or rutting spots that are discovered shall have the soft material excavated and the void filled with suitable material, compacted as hereinafter specified.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. General1. All excavations of every description and of whatever substances encountered within

the grading limits shall be performed to the grades, slopes, and elevations indicated. All excavated materials which are not considered suitable for fill and any surplus of excavated material which is not required for fill shall be disposed of by the Contractor. Excavations shall extend a sufficient distance away from the walls to permit erection and removal of forms and installation of drains and other permanent work. Excavations shall be carefully made to the depths indicated, with the bottoms level, free of loose material, and free of all loam, organic material and other unsuitable material as hereinafter specified. All excavations shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the placing of any concrete.

B. Rock Excavation1. All excavation is unclassified. Where rock is encountered as indicated by the Engineer

or the Engineer’s representative, it shall be excavated, undercut and backfilled in accordance with the following paragraphs. No additional payment will be allowed for undercut or placement of approved granular material.

2. For structures, rock shall be removed to a depth of at least 12 inches below the indicated bottom of the structure foundation, unless the entire foundation rests on the same rock ledge. If the foundation rests on rock, the rock shall be leveled to a hard, clean surface. If rock is excavated below the foundation, the resulting void shall be filled with approved granular material as previously specified. The excavation shall allow 18 inches, horizontally, outside structure walls or outside concrete work for which forms are required.

3. For utility trenches, rock shall be removed to a depth of eight inches below the bottom of the pipe and all undercut trench excavation shall be backfilled with approved granular material.

C. Utility Excavation

1. General: The Contractor shall excavate all materials encountered in the trenches and ditches, detailed on the drawings along the alignments shown on the drawings. Trenches shall be graded to avoid local high points. Trenches shall be graded either level or on a continuous upslope to the high points designated on the drawings. Trenches shall be such a depth to provide the minimum cover shown on the drawings, as measured from the top of the pipe to the existing ground surface or the final grade, whichever is lower.

2. Excavated Material: Excavated suitable material to be utilized for backfilling shall be piled alongside the trench at a distance sufficient to avoid overloading the trench walls and causing caveins, and located to prevent obstruction of driveways, roads and



hydrants. All excavated material not suitable for or not required for backfilling, including that from the trenches and the ditches, shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor at his expense.

3. Dewatering: The Contractor shall utilize means necessary to prevent surface water from washing into the trench. Grading or construction of berms shall be performed as required to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations. Any water that accumulates in the trench shall be promptly removed. Where conditions are such that running or standing water occurs in the trench bottom or the soil in the trench bottom displays a "quick" tendency, the water should be removed by pumps and suitable means such as well points or pervious underdrain bedding until the pipe has been installed and the backfill has been placed to a sufficient height to prevent pipe flotation.

4. Trench Width: Trench width at the ground surface may vary with and depend upon depth, type of soils, and position of surface structures. The minimum clear width of the trench, sheeting or unsheeted, measured at the springline of the pipe should be one foot greater than the outside diameter of the pipe. The maximum clear width of the trench at the top of the pipe should not exceed a width equal to the pipe outside diameter plus two feet. If the above defined trench widths must be exceeded or if the pipe is installed in a compacted embankment, pipe embedment should be compacted to a point of at least 2.5 pipe diameters from the pipe on both sides of the pipe or the trench walls, whichever is less. Excavation at manholes and similar structures shall be sufficient to provide 12 inches in the clear between the outside of the structure and the embankment or sheeting.

5. Trench Bottom, General: The trench shall be excavated to the depth required and shall provide a firm, stable, and uniform support for the full length of pipe on solid or undisturbed soil, or as otherwise specified for gravity pipelines. Bell holes and depressions shall be provided to permit proper joint assembly and pipe support. Any part of the trench bottom excavated below the established pipe grade shall be backfilled and compacted as required to provide firm pipe support. Ledge rock, boulders, and large stones shall be removed to provide six (6) inches of soil cushion on all sides of the pipe, including the bottom, and on all sides of accessories.

6. Trench Bottom, Gravity Pipelines: Gravity pipelines are defined as sanitary sewers, storm sewers, culverts, and drains of all material types. The bottom of the trench shall be excavated to a minimum overdepth of four (4) inches below the bottom of the pipe to provide for the hereinafter specified pipe bedding for the entire length of the gravity pipeline. Any part of the trench bottom that is excavated below the required level shall be backfilled with approved granular material.

7. Trench Bottom, PVC Pressure Pipelines: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, trench bottoms for pressurized PVC pipe (water lines and force mains) shall meet the requirements specified for gravity pipelines.

8. Unsuitable Subgrade: When an unstable subgrade condition is encountered, which will not provide adequate pipe support, additional trench depth shall be excavated to a stable foundation under the supervision of the Engineer’s quality control representative and backfilled with approved granular material. Backfill, removal, and disposal of unsuitable material shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

D. Ditch Excavation



1. Cut ditch, gutter, and channel changes to cross sections and grades indicated on the Drawings. Remove, trim, or dress all roots, stumps, rock and foreign matter in the sides and bottom of each ditch, gutter, and channel to conform to the slope, grade and shape of the section indicated. No excavated material shall be deposited closer than 3 feet to the edge of ditches, unless otherwise indicated. Care shall be taken not to excavate ditches and gutters below the grades indicated. If over-excavation occurs, backfill to grade with suitable material in 9-inch lifts and compact to 95% standard Proctor as determined by ASTM D698.

E. Excess Material

1. Excess material, including but not limited to, excess cut material, unsuitable fill material, and rock or other unsuitable material resulting from excavation or blasting operations, shall be disposed of by the Contractor on-site. On-site excess materials shall be compacted to minimum 85% maximum dry density (ASTM D698 Standard Proctor). All removal, hauling, and re-placeement for disposal of excess material shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.3 BEDDING

A. Gravity pipelines shall be bedded in compacted approved granular material in accordance with the paragraph 3.2 C 6 of this section (Trench Bottom, Gravity Pipelines).

B. Bedding for PVC gravity pipe shall extend to four (4) inches over the crown of the pipe.

C. Bedding for Ductile Iron gravity pipe shall extend to the pipe springline.

D. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, bedding for PVC pressure pipe shall extend to the pipe springline.

E. Bedding for Ductile Iron pressure pipe shall be suitable material.

F. Bedding for storm sewers and culverts shall be in accordance with VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, and Standards.

3.4 FILLING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING

A. General

1. Suitable material (as described in Part 2 Products) shall be used for fill, backfill and subgrade preparation. Frozen material shall not be used as fill or backfill. Any additional material necessary for establishing the indicated grades shall be furnished by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer as part of this contract. The maximum particle size shall be three inches largest dimension, except in the uppermost lift, where the maximum particle size shall be two inches largest dimension. Fill material shall be placed in successive horizontal layers not to exceed nine (9) inches of loose material, and then thoroughly compacted as hereinafter specified.

2. Fill or backfill adjacent to foundation and retaining walls shall be placed in nine (9) inch horizontal layers, each layer being moistened or dried and compacted as hereinafter specified. Special care shall be taken to prevent wedging action as the backfill proceeds.

3. Embankment slopes shall be constructed by filling one (1) foot beyond the proposed finished slope surface for each lift. Compaction equipment shall work to the edge of each lift. After the entire fill is placed and compacted, the outside foot of the slope



shall be trimmed to the design slope with a dozer. No slopes shall be steeper than 2 horizontal to 1.

B. Off-Site Material

1. Where off-site material is required to provide an adequate suitable material for fill, this material shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use. Off-site material shall be free of large roots, stumps, debris, and all other deleterious materials which may affect the integrity of any fills. In addition, off-site borrow material shall meet the following requirements:a. Maximum % finer than a No. 200 sieve: ......................50%b. Maximum Liquid Limit: ...................................................80c. Maximum Plastic Limit: ..................................................50d. Minimum Plastic Index .....................................................5

2. Provision, hauling, and placement of off-site materials shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Compaction– Structures, Roadways And Grassed Areas

1. Compaction shall be performed by approved compaction equipment adjacent or underlying to the structures. The compaction in grassed areas shall be 70-80 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor). The compaction under structures, walks and under pavement shall be 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor). The materials shall be aerated or moistened, as required to provide a moisture content that falls within 3 percentage points of either side of optimum, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

D. Utility Backfilling, Compaction

1. Initial Backfill: Initial backfill shall begin at the top of the bedding and shall be placed in six inch layers up to a level at least one foot above the crown of the pipe. Initial backfill shall be compacted to a minimum 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D698 (STANDARD PROCTOR). No lumps greater than one inch in diameter shall be allowed in initial backfill material. Backfill under roadways, driveways, and sidewalks shall be aggregate backfill material, unless otherwise required by VDOT. Each layer shall be thoroughly tamped and compacted by approved equipment. Special care shall be taken in using a mechanical tamper directly over the pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill for trenches not subjected to vehicular traffic shall be placed in layers no greater than one foot thick and compacted to at least 90 percent maximum density as determined by ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor). No lumps greater than five inches in diameter shall be allowed in final backfill material. Each layer shall be moistened or dried as necessary to provide a moisture content that falls within three (3) percentage points of either side of optimum moisture unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer. Backfill compaction shall be accomplished by use of equipment designed and suitable for the materials being compacted and their specific location or situation. Compaction by “puddling”, either natural or man-induced, shall not be allowed. Topsoil (in grassed areas) shall be deposited in the final layer of backfill to guarantee the areas will be returned to original or better conditions. Final backfill in grassed areas shall be mounded three (3) inches above surrounding ground to allow for settlement.



3. Final Backfill Under Roadways, Driveways, and Sidewalks: Where excavation has been made through pavement, subgrades of roadways under construction, curbs, driveways, sidewalks, or where structures are undercut by excavation, the backfilling is to be made of the approved aggregate backfill material, or as otherwise specified, in layers not greater than six inches thick, with each layer thoroughly compacted to subgrade. Backfill shall be deposited for the full width of the trench and compacted to 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor). Work within VDOT rights-of-way shall meet all requirements of the VDOT. The trench in paved areas shall be maintained daily, as required, to provide a smooth crossing for vehicles until such time as the final pavement is placed.

E. Placing Of Topsoil

1. Immediately before placing the topsoil, the areas on which it is to be placed shall be deeply and thoroughly raked so as to disturb the surface and provide means for bonding of the topsoil. Spread topsoil over the prescribed area in a uniform layer yielding a minimum settled thickness of 4". Topsoil surface shall be at final grades indicated on plans.

3.5 RESTORATION

A. General

1. Physical conditions disturbed by the Work shall be restored to conditions equal to or better than those existing prior to the Work. Repair of damages to structures and utilities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Restoration includes, but is not limited to, fine grading, seeding, pavement replacement, concrete replacement, and drainage structures.

B. Landscape

1. All disturbed areas not covered by pavement, structure, or grassed areas and all areas disturbed by the construction activity shall be fertilized, limed, seeded with the type of seed that produces a stand of grass similar to the existing and mulched.

C. Pavement Replacement

1. Existing pavement which has been cut, damaged, or removed during construction shall be replaced in accordance with the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications.

3.6 FINISH GRADING AND CLEAN-UP

A. Finish grading shall be done as required to establish the slopes indicated. The grades shall be formed to easy contours sloping toward inlets and ditches. The grading shall eliminate low spots and pockets that do not drain. Ditches shall be excavated to the sections and elevations shown and shall be excavated on smooth slopes to avoid low spots and pockets that do not drain.

B. The surface of all excavations and fill and all disturbed areas shall be finished to a smooth surface, with the grades sloping away from the buildings. Swales and ditches shall be finished so that effective drainage results. Proper allowance shall be made for topsoil and for pavement thickness. Any settling or washing prior to acceptance of the work shall be repaired at no additional expense to the Owner. Topsoil and seeding of all disturbed areas shall be performed in accordance with Section 02920.



C. All lumber, earth clods or rocks larger than four inches and other undesirable materials shall be removed from the site at the completion of construction. Clean up shall be done as promptly as practicable and/or at least once a week. Ditches which are disturbed shall be restored as promptly as practical and/or at least once a week. Establish and maintain sediment and erosion control measures as stipulated in Section 02370.



WATER DISTRIBUTION 312100 -1

SECTION 312100 - WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for water service.

1.2 DEFINITIONS


B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

1.4 PERMITTING REQUIREMENTSA. All materials, installation and testing shall comply with City of Richmond requirements.

The Contractor shall review these specifications against the City of Richmond requirements at the time of construction and bring any conflicts immediately to the attention of the Engineer for resolution.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. 2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service

piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping.

E. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable-water-service piping.



2. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic water.


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient

dew-point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.

C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside.

F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.


A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.2. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Owner's written permission.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate connection to water main with the Owner.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. PVC, Polyvinyl chloride pipe: ASTM D2241, rigid, un-plasticized PVC, extruded from virgin parent material. Provide pipe homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, wrinkles, and dents.

1. 3" diameter and smaller: PVC ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 with solvent weld joints. All fittings shall be ASTM 2467 schedule 80 PVC solvent weld fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

b. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:

1. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping to be joined.a. Standard: AWWA C219.b. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard for type indicated.c. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.

d. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum.e. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

2.5 VALVESA. Curb Valves (for water service): Curb valves shall be same nominal size as the service

line and shall be NSF 61 certified.

1. Curb valves shall be quarter turn and have a brass or bronze body and plug. Elastomeric o-ring seals in machined grooves shall be provided at the stem and ports.

2. Curb valves shall be provided with female thread ends to allow a PVC adapter to be screwed in to the valve.

3. Curb valves shall be designed for operation with a tee wrench.

2.6 VALVE BOXES

A. Valve Boxes: Provide two-piece cast-iron valve boxes in accordance with VDOT standard detail. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve.

1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.



2.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTOR AND APPURTANCESA. See drawings

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications:

1. Water distribution pipe, 3” and smaller shall be PVC schedule 40 pipe with solvent weld joints and schedule 80 PVC solvent weld fittings.

2. Above ground piping in RPZ enclosure: see drawings.

B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.

D. Flanges, unions, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Underground Valves, NPS 2 and smaller: Curb valve in accordance with requirements listed above.

3.4 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE

A. Where domestic water service to a single building is required to be interrupted coordinate the timing and duration of the interruption with the Owner.

B. Where fire mains are required to be interrupted, provide at least three weeks written notice to the Owner providing date and duration of outage.

C. Where domestic water service to more than one building is required, provide at least three weeks written notice to the Owner providing date and duration of outage.

3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated.

B. Install PVC pipe according to ASTM F 645 and AWWA M23.



E. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 42 inches.

F. Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other obstructions that cannot be disturbed.

G. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.

H. Where indicated on the drawings terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to water-piping systems when those systems are installed.

3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Make pipe joints according to the following:

1. Solvent weld according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's written instructions.2. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping

materials, with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for joining piping of dissimilar metals.

3.7 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Curb valves. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.


A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours.

1. Increase pressure in 50 psig (350-kPa) increments and inspect each joint

between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig (0 kPa). Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour with a maximum pressure variation of 5 psig

C. Leakage Test: Conduct the leakage test concurrently with the hydrostatic test. The maximum allowed leakage is determined by the following formula:

L = N x D x P ½

7400

where L = allowable leakage, in gph

where N = No. of joints in test section

where D = nominal pipe diameter, in inches

where P = average test pressure, in psig



1. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.

D. Prepare reports of testing activities.

3.13 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork."

B. Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker indicating plastic water-service piping, on main electrical meter panel.

3.14 CLEANING & DISINFECTION

A. Clean distribution piping as follows:

1. Flush new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use.

2. All valves and hydrants shall be operated during flushing operation. Flushing velocities shall be at least 2.5 feet per second.

B. Use disinfecting procedure described in AWWA C651 or as follows:

1. Conform to AWWA C601 and City of Richmond regulations, Pllacement of chlorine powder or tablets inside the pipe during installation shall not be allowed. Disinfect water mains after the piping has passed the pressure and leakage tests.

2. The following are minimal disinfection and testing requirements. Alterations to these requirements are acceptable if allowed under the City of Richmond regulations and approved by the Engineer a. Apply a chlorine solution with a concentration between 50 mg/L and 100 mg/L.

The chlorine solution shall remain in the piping for a minimum of 24 hours. The concentration at the end of this period shall be at least 10mg/L in all sections of the main. Repeat the entire procedure if the residual is less than 10 mg/L.

b. While the chlorinated water is being added, operate all appurtenances (valves, hydrants, etc.) shall be operated so as to completely disinfect the new work.

c. Position valves so that the chlorine solution in the section being disinfected will not flow into water mains in active service.

C. After the 24 hour retention period, flush the main until residual testing indicates that the chlorine concentration is approximately that of the neighboring service area.

1. Dispose of the heavily chlorinated water into a sanitary sewer or tank truck.2. Do not empty this water onto roadways, or into ditches, culverts, streams or

wetlands.

D. After disinfection and final flushing, and prior to placing the lines in service, the Contractor shall take bacteriological samples. Samples shall be collected at regular intervals, not exceeding 2,000 linear feet, throughout the length of the main. Two negative samples collected at least 24 hours apart are required.



1. The testing laboratory performing the bacteriological analysis shall be certified by the VDH. Acceptable test results shall indicate negative presence of coliform bacteria.

2. Submit three (3) copies of the laboratory analysis to the Owner.3. Should safe results not occur after laboratory tests, the Contractor shall, at his

expense, repeat the disinfection procedure until safe results are obtained.

E. Maintain dry and sanitary conditions and prevent contamination of any piping.

F. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, contamination has occurred, the Contractor shall repeat the disinfection and testing at his cost and expense.

G. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities and submit to the Owner.



CONCRETE 321313 - 1

SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Summary

A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete for the following:

1. Curbs and gutters.


1. Division 31 Section "Earthwork" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course.

C. Quality Assurance

1. Reference Standards:a. The latest edition of the following standards, as referenced herein, shall be

applicable.1) Virginia Department of Transportation, “Road & Bridge Specifications”2) “Standard Specifications for Highway Materials and Methods of Sampling

and Testing, American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).”

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. B. Concrete:

1. Submit the design mix for each class of concrete prior to use in the Work.

C. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions.

D. Test Results:

1. The testing laboratory shall submit written reports of all tests, investigations, and recommendations to the Contractor and the Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Concrete:

1. All cast-in-place concrete shall be ready mixed concrete meeting the following criteria:

a. 28 day compressive strength-3000 psib. Air entrainment-4% to 8%c. Slump-2" to 4"

B. Curing and Materials:


CONCRETE 321313 - 2

1. Impervious Sheeting: ASTM C171.2. Liquid Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309, compound shall be free of paraffin or petroleum.

C. Sealants:1. Joint Sealers: ASTM D 1850.

D. Forms:1. Forms shall be of wood or steel, straight of sufficient strength to resist springing

during depositing and consolidating concrete, and of a height equal to the full depth of the finished concrete.

2. Wood forms shall be surfaced plank, 2-inch nominal thickness, straight and free from warp, twist, loose knots, splits or other defects. Wood forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet, with a minimum of three stakes per form, at maximum spacing of 4 feet. Corners, deep sections, and radius bends shall have additional stakes and braces, as required. Radius bends may be formed with 3/4-inch boards, laminated to the required thickness.

3. Steel forms shall be channel-formed sections with a flat top surface and with welded braces at each end and at not less than two intermediate points. Form ends shall be interlocked and self- aligning. Forms shall include flexible forms for radius forming, corner forms, form spreaders, and fillers. Forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet, with a minimum of two welded stake pockets per form. Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with chamfered heads and pointed tips, designed for use with steel forms.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 24 hours before placing concrete in order to give the Engineer an opportunity to inspect the formwork, reinforcing and related items prior to placement of the concrete.

B. Delivery tickets shall show the amount of cement, brand, and amount of all admixtures, in addition to information required by ASTM C94, Section 14. Water added on the job shall be approved and the amount noted on the delivery ticket and initialed by the Contractor.

3.2 SUBBASE PREPARATION

A. The completed subbase shall be tested for grade and cross section with a template extending the full width of the concrete and supported between side forms.

B. The subbase shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition in conformity with the required section and established grade, until the concrete is placed.

D. The subbase shall be in a moist condition when concrete is placed.

E. The subbase shall be prepared and protected so as to produce a subbase free from frost when the concrete is deposited.


CONCRETE 321313 - 3

3.3 FORMWORK

A. Earth cuts may not be used as forms for vertical surfaces.

B. All forms shall be built mortar tight and of materials sufficient in strength to hold concrete without bulging between supports. Forms shall be maintained to eliminate the formation of joints due to shrinkage of the forms. Concrete, misshapen by bulges or deformations caused by inadequate forms, shall be removed or corrected as ordered by the Engineer. All replacements or corrections shall be made at the Contractor’s expense.

C. All surfaces of wooden forms that will be in contact with exposed concrete shall be thoroughly treated with an approved lacquer in the procedure recommended by the manufacturer. Forms so treated shall be protected from being damaged or dirtied prior to placing of the concrete.

D. Metal forms shall be treated with an approved form lacquer or may be treated with an approved form oil. The metal used for forms shall be of sufficient thickness to remain true to shape. All bolt and rivet heads shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal, without injury to the concrete. Metal forms which do not have smooth surfaces, correct alignment and clean surfaces shall not be used.

E. Side forms shall not be removed for less than 12 hours after finishing has been completed.

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING

A. Preparation:1. Set forms true to line and grade and anchor rigidly in position.2. Transverse expansion joints shall be installed equally at not more than 25 feet on

center, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, or as detailed on the Drawings.3. Joints shall be provided at a minimum of every 10 feet, at changes in angle, and at

the ends of radii. Joints shall be tooled or cold joints.4. Where new curb connects to existing, provide #5 rebar dowel, 12 inches long, with a

minimum of 3” embedded and epoxied into the existing curb.

B. Concrete Placement:

1. Concrete shall be placed in the forms in one layer of such thickness that when compacted and finished the concrete will be of the thickness indicated. After concrete has been placed in the forms, a strike-off guided by side forms shall be used to bring the surface to proper section to be compacted.

2. The concrete shall be tamped and consolidated with a suitable wood or metal tamping bar, and the surface shall be finished to grade with a wood float. Finished surface of the walk shall not vary more than 3/16 inch from the testing edge of a 20-foot straightedge. Irregularities exceeding the above shall be satisfactorily corrected. The surface shall be divided into rectangular areas by means of contraction joints spaced at intervals shown on the drawings.

3. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 unless otherwise specified herein.

4. Cold Weather Concreting: Comply with ACI 305 for placement at temperatures of, or expected to be, below 40F.


CONCRETE 321313 - 4

5. Hot Weather Concreting: Comply with ACI 306 for placement at temperature of, or expected to be, above 90F.

D. Concrete Finishing:

1. After straight edging, when most of the water sheen has disappeared, and just before the concrete hardens, the surface shall be finished to a smooth and uniformly fine granular or sandy texture free of waves, irregularities, or tool marks. A scored surface shall be produced by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that of the traffic, or as otherwise shown on the drawings.

2. All slab edges, including those at formed joints, shall be finished carefully with an edger having a radius of 1/8 inch. Corner and edges which have crumbled and areas which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing shall be cleaned and filled solidly with a properly proportioned mortar mixture and then finished.

3. The completed surface shall be uniform in color and free of surface blemishes and tool marks.

3.5 CONTRACTION JOINTS

A. Contraction (Control) Joints: Construct contraction joints to form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch wide by 1/4 slab depth or inserts 1/4 inch wide by 1/4 inch wide by 1/4 of slab depth, unless otherwise indicated. Sawcutting is to be done as soon after concrete placement and finishing as possible without raveling.

3.6 CURING

A. Any of the following curing methods are acceptable:

B. Impervious Sheeting Method:

1. The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine spray of water and then covered with impervious sheeting material. Sheets shall be laid directly on the concrete surface with the light colored side up and overlapped 12 inches when a continuous sheet is not used.

2. The curing medium shall not be less than 18 inches wider that the concrete surface to be cured, and shall be securely weighted down by heavy wood planks, or by placing a bank of moist earth along edges and laps in the sheets.

3. Sheets shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced if torn or otherwise damaged during curing. The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to be cured for not less than 7 days.

C. Membrane Curing Method:

1. The entire exposed surface shall be cured with a membrane forming curing compound.

2. Curing compound shall be applied in two (2) coats by hand operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square feet per gallon for both coats, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer based upon manufacturer’s data.

3. The second coat shall be applied in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application of the first coat. The compound shall form a uniform,


CONCRETE 321313 - 5

continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections. Apply an additional cost to all surfaces showing discontinuity, pinholes or other defects.

4. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after curing compound has been applied shall be resprayed by the above method and at the above coverage at no additional cost to the Owner.

5. Expansion-joint openings shall be sealed at the top by inserting moistened paper or fiber rope or covering with strips of waterproof paper prior to application of the curing compound, in a manner to prevent the curing compound entering the joint.

6. Concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be adequately protected for 7 days from pedestrian and vehicular traffic and from any other action that might disrupt the continuity of the membrane. Any area covered with curing compound and damaged by subsequent construction operations within the 7 day curing period shall be resprayed as specified above at no additional expense to the Owner.

3.7 BACKFILLING AND RESTORATION

A. After curing, debris shall be removed, and the area adjoining the concrete shall be backfilled, graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding area in accordance with lines and grades indicated.

B. All lawns, pavements, driveways, shrubs, or other improvements affected by concrete placement shall be restored to their original condition.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall protect the curbing and keep it in alignment and “first class” condition until the completion of the Contract. Any curbing, which is damaged prior to final acceptance of the Work, shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

3.9 TESTING

A. The General Contractor shall coordinate the services of an independent testing laboratory, retained by the Owner.

B. Individuals performing concrete field tests shall have proper training, qualifications, and shall be certified as a Concrete Field Testing Technician - Grade 1, by the American Concrete Institute, or other recognized certification


CONCRETE 321313 - 6

conforming to the minimum requirements of the American Concrete Institute's Certification Program which requires the successful completion of a written and performance examination on the applicable ASTM test methods of this section.

C. The testing laboratory shall take samples and make tests for each 50 cubic yards of concrete, or fraction thereof, but in no case less than one set for each class of concrete for each day's placement. Sampling of freshly mixed concrete shall be in accordance with ASTM C172.

D. Standard slump tests, air content tests and concrete temperature tests shall be taken for each batch of concrete delivered to the project to indicate the quality of the concrete in the field. Slump, air content and concrete temperatures need to be recorded on concrete test reports only when taken from a batch for which compressive strength cylinders are also made. However, field tests for any batches that do not produce results consistent with the requirements of these specifications are sufficient for the Owner’s or Engineer’s representative to reject the batch in question.

E. When the field tests produce results that do not meet the requirements of this specification, the design mix and water content shall be adjusted at the batch plant to produce the required properties for all concrete that is subsequently placed. Concrete that meets the required field tests, but does not produce the required 28-day compressive strength may be required to be field cored and tested in accordance with ASTM C42 as directed by the Engineer at the Contractor’s expense.

F. Each compressive strength test shall consist of four standard 6" x 12" cylinders; one (1) to be tested at 7 days, two (2) shall be tested at 28 days, and a spare to be saved for a minimum of 56 days. Should the average of the 28-day strength tests not meet the required average compressive strength then the spare cylinder will be tested at 56 days, otherwise the spare may be discarded after 56 days. On site tests shall also include temperature, slump and air content as previously described herein.

G. The testing facility shall provide one (1) copy of the compressive strength test reports to the Contractor and one (1) copy to the Engineer for review. The Engineer, upon reviewing the reports, will forward one (1) copy to the Owner with comments. The compressive strength test reports shall include:

1. Project name and exact location where concrete was placed consistent with Project Drawing nomenclature.

2. Concrete suppliers name, truck number, and mix ticket number.

3. Concrete temperature in accordance with ASTM C1064 and air temperature at time of delivery.

4. Air content determined in accordance with ASTM C173 or C231.

5. Slump determined in accordance with ASTM C143.

6. 7-day and 28-day compressive strength test result.



December 12, 2016

UNIT PAVING 321400 - 1

SECTION 321400 - UNIT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Brick pavers set in mortar setting beds.

2. Granite pavers.

3. Steel edge restraints.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.

B. Samples for unit pavers and edge restraints.


A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or build on frozen subgrade or

setting beds.

B. Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed: Install bituminous setting bed only

when ambient temperature is above 40 deg F and when base is dry.

C. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout:

1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with cold-weather construction

requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction

requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Do not apply mortar

to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F and higher.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BRICK PAVERS

A. Brick Pavers: Light-traffic paving brick; ASTM C 902, Class SX Type I Application

PX. Provide brick without frogs or cores in surfaces exposed to view in the completed

Work.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,

but are not limited to, the following:


December 12, 2016


a. North Carolina Common Brick.

b. City of Richmond, Virginia standard sidewalk brick.

2. Thickness: As indicated.

3. Face Size: As indicated.

4. Color: As selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Temporary Protective Coating: Precoat exposed surfaces of brick pavers with a

continuous film of a temporary protective coating that is compatible with brick, mortar,

and grout products.

2.2 STONE PAVERS

A. Granite Pavers: Rectangular paving slabs made from granite complying with ASTM

C 615.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, stone varieties that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. As supplied by Luck Stone or approved equal

2. Color and Grain: Geyser Spring Flame Finish. Submit samples for review by

Landscape Architect.


4. Face Size: As indicated.

B. Bluestone Pavers: Rectangular paving slabs made of bluestone.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, stone varieties that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

PART 3 - As supplied by Luck Stone or approved equal.

1. Color and Grain: Supply samples for review by Landscape Architect.


3. Face size: As indicated.

3.2 EDGE RESTRAINTS

A. Steel Edge Restraints: Manufacturer's standard painted steel edging 1/4 inchthick by 9

inches high with loops pressed from or welded to face to receive stakes at 36

incheso.c., and steel stakes 15 incheslong for each loop.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,

but are not limited to, the following:

a. Border Concepts, Inc.

b. Collier Metal Specialties, Inc.


December 12, 2016


c. J. D. Russell Company (The).

d. Sure-loc Edging Corporation.

e. Or Approved Equal.

2. Color: As selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.

B. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade

2A1.

3.4 MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II.


C. Sand: ASTM C 144.

D. Water: Potable.

3.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written

instructions Discard mortars and grout if they have reached their initial set before being

used.

B. Portland Cement-Lime Setting-Bed Mortar: Type M complying with ASTM C 270,

Proportion Specification.

C. Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar: Comply with written

instructions of latex-additive manufacturer and as necessary to produce stiff mixture

with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive pavers.

D. Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Bond Coat: Proportion and mix portland cement,

aggregate, and liquid latex for bond coat to comply with written instructions of liquid-

latex manufacturer.

E. Packaged Grout Mix: Proportion and mix grout ingredients according to grout

manufacturer's written instructions.


December 12, 2016


PART 4 - EXECUTION


A. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend

of colors and textures.

B. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide pattern indicated

and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible.

C. Joint Pattern: As indicated.

D. Tolerances: do not exceed 1/16-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) or 1/8 inch

in 24 inchesand 1/4 inch in 10 feetfrom level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of

paving.

E. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at locations and of

widths indicated. Provide compressible foam filler as backing for sealant-filled joints.

Install joint filler before setting pavers.

F. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing aggregate.

G. Joint Treatment: Place unit pavers with hand-tight joints. Fill joints by sweeping

sand over paved surface until joints are filled. Remove excess sand after joints are

filled.

4.2 MORTAR SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS

A. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed.

Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.

B. Apply mortar-bed bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before

placing mortar bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing

setting bed. Do not exceed 1/16-inch thickness for bond coat.

C. Apply mortar bed over bond coat; spread and screed mortar bed to uniform thickness at

subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated.

D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before

initial set. Before placing pavers, cut back, bevel edge, and remove and discard

setting-bed material that has reached initial set.

E. Wet brick pavers before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.

per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so

they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

F. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers

on mortar bed, apply uniform 1/16-inchthick bond coat to mortar bed or to back of

each paver with a flat trowel.


December 12, 2016


G. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with

setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver

in a single operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or

disturb pavers for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.

H. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide 3/8-inchnominal joint width with variations not

exceeding plus or minus 1/16 inch



PERMEABLE UNIT PAVING 321443 -1

SECTION 321443 - PERMEABLES UNIT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Solid concrete pavers with openings between pavers filled with aggregate.2. Aggregate joint filler for pavers.3. Aggregate setting bed for pavers.4. Aggregate reservoir for pavers.5. Filter fabric.6. Underdrain.


A. Product Data: For materials other than aggregates.

B. Sieve Analyses: For aggregate materials, according to ASTM C 136, including requirement for No. 200 sieve.

C. Samples:

1. Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated.2. Aggregate setting bed material.3. Aggregate reservoir material.


A. Sub-contractor installing the porous paving system must have experience on at least 3 projects utilizing porous pavers.

B. Prior to work, arrange for a pre-installation meeting with the Engineer to review the stabilization of adjacent areas, means of protecting the work from sediment, and installation methods.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS

A. Solid Concrete Pavers for Porous Paving: Solid interlocking paving units of shapes that provide openings between units, complying with ASTM C 936/C 936M, resistant to freezing and thawing when tested according to ASTM C 67, and made from normal-weight aggregates.1. Eagle Bay PICP



2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 AGGREGATE JOINT FILLER MATERIALS

A. Joint Filler: See detail.

B. Aggregate shall be washed with less than 2% passing the No. 200 sieve.

2.3 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS

A. Leveling Course: See detail.


2.4 AGGREGATE RESERVOIR MATERIALS

A. Graded Aggregate for Base Course: See detail.


2.5 FILTER FABRIC

A. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven needle-punched polypropylene geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications as follows:1. Grab tensile strength equal or greater than 120 lbs (ASTM D4362).2. Flow rate greater than 125 gpm.sf (ASTM D4491).3. Apparent Opening Size (AOS) equivalent to a US #70 or #80 sieve.

2.6 UNDERDRAIN

A. Underdrain: Perforated PVC (AASHTO M 252) with 3/8 inch perforations at 6 inches on center in accordance with Virginia BMP Clearinghouse Specification No. 7, Table 7.5.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Sediment from adjacent areas can clog the porous paving and underlying soils. Do not excavate to subgrade or install any part of the porous paving system until the adjacent site is stabilized with vegetation. Failure to protect the porous paving and underlying soils from sediment will result in the Contractor removing and replacing sections of the porous paving.

B. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be structurally unsound or visible in finished work.



C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.

D. Tolerances:

1. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush.

2. Variation from Level or Indicated Slope: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 24 inches (3 mm in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) or a maximum of 1/2 inch (13 mm).

E. Provide edge restraints as indicated on plans. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.

3.2 SETTING-BED INSTALLATION

A. Excavate to subgrade. Do not compact subgrade. Do not allow equipment on subgrade.

B. Roughen subgrade with toothed excavator bucket.

C. Place filter fabric over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300 mm).

D. Place aggregate reservoir, compact by lightly tamping with plate vibrator to keep from settling, and screed to depth indicated on the drawings.

E. Place drainage geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300 mm).

F. Place leveling course, and screed, taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted.

3.3 PAVER INSTALLATION

A. Set unit pavers on leveling course, being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have lugs or spacer bars to control spacing, place pavers hand tight against lugs or spacer bars. If pavers do not have lugs or spacer bars, place pavers with a 1/16-inch- (1.6-mm-) minimum and 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) maximum joint width

B. Compact pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz.

C. Place graded aggregate fill immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Spread and screed aggregate fill level with tops of pavers.

D. As work progresses, remove and replace pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.


LAWNS AND GRASSES 329200 -1

SECTION 329200 - LAWNS AND GRASSES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, and services required to establish a permanent vegetative cover for lawns over all areas disturbed or altered by construction.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Division 31 Section “Earthwork”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submittals on seed and fertilizer shall include a test report from the Virginia Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (VDACS) or a comparable testing lab. The test report shall bear the specific lot number of the product as well as the date sampled, the purity, and germination, the percent weed seed, the analysis, date tested as well as other pertinent data about the product.

B. Guarantee: Written guarantee for a period of one growing season (minimum six months). Replacement shall be at no cost to the Owner.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. The materials and method of construction for protective covering and erosion control shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT) Standards, the Road and Bridge Specifications.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. See Division 31 Section “Earthwork” for topsoil definition.

B. Topsoil shall be stockpiled, on the project site, for reuse on all disturbed areas in the grading and landscape work.

C. Seeding shall begin immediately after final grading is completed in the area to be seeded.

D. Seeding shall only be performed between March 1 and May 31 or between August 15 and September 30. At other times, seeding with annual rye for temporary cover shall be made until the desired spring or later summer seeding time.

E. Seeding shall not be performed on frozen or muddy grounds or when prevailing winds exceed five (5) miles per hour.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Materials shall be delivered in unbroken containers, clearly marked by the manufacturer as to contents. Limes, Fertilizer and Seed shall be labeled as to proportions, analysis and quality. Store all materials in a manner affording protection from damage by weather or vandalism.

2.2 LIME

A. Lime shall be ground or pulverized agricultural grade limestone containing not less than 85 percent total carbonates and shall be ground to such fineness that at least 50% will pass a 100 mesh sieve and at least 90% will pass a 20 mesh sieve.

2.3 FERTILIZER

A. The fertilizer shall be an agricultural grade 10-20-10 or any equivalent 1-2-1 ratio fertilizer. Fertilizer shall be commercial/agricultural grade, free flowing, uniform in composition, and shall conform to State and Federal regulations. Fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's guaranteed statement of analysis.

2.4 SEED

A. Grass seed for lawns and open fields shall be as specified on the drawings. .

B. Grass seed shall be clean, fresh stock, and labeled in accordance with the Federal Seed Act and shall be produced by a recognized manufacturer and guaranteed by the dealer. The seed shall have the State of Virginia certification.

2.5 MULCH

A. Mulch shall be straw or grain mulch as described, or wood cellulose fiber.

B. Straw mulch shall be from oats wheat and or barley and shall be free of noxious weeds and noxious weed seeds. The straw will not contain sticks, rocks, or other objectionable material and will not be wet, moldy, or otherwise undesirable.

C. Wood cellulose fiber used for hydraulic mulching shall consist of specially manufactured commercially available products containing wood cellulose fiber, recycled newsprint fibers, or a combination of these materials. The wood cellulose fiber or newsprint fiber will contain no growth or germination inhibiting factor and shall contain a dye for color. The dye shall allow the operator to monitor the amount of mulch being applied to the area to insure proper coverage.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. All subgrade for finished lawn areas and drainage channels shall be raked to remove all debris and stones over two (2) inches in diameter. All subgrade for open field areas and shoulders shall be raked to remove all debris and stone over three (3) inches in diameter.

B. Prior to spreading topsoil, the subgrade shall be loosened to a minimum of four (4) inches by tilling, disking or harrowing.

3.2 TOPSOIL PREPARATION

A. Topsoil shall be spread over the prepared subgrade in all lawn areas to a minimum depth of four (4) inches. Bond topsoil to subgrade by tilling, disking or harrowing. Topsoil shall not be spread over the subgrade when either the topsoil or subgrade is frozen or excessively wet.

B. Where topsoil is not applied, the surface of finished grade shall also be prepared as specified for topsoil hereinafter.

C. Prior to seeding finished lawn areas and drainage channels, topsoil surface shall be raked to remove all debris and stones over two (2) inches in diameter and to smooth any surface irregularities. Prior to seeding open field areas and shoulders, topsoil shall be raked to remove all debris and stones over three (3) inches in diameter and to smooth any surface irregularities.

D. Topsoil finish grade of lawn areas and open fields shall be slightly higher than existing grade and rounded off to avoid abrupt changes in grade.

3.3 PREPARATION OF AREAS TO BE SEEDED

A. Slopes 3:1 or steeper

1. On slopes, use the walking or tracking method with a dozer or other tracked equipment. Vertically "walk" the slope so as to leave track marks perpendicular to the toe of the slope. Remove large rocks, stones and roots over two inches in diameter.

2. Where this tracking of slope areas is not possible or practical, the use of a slope chain may be used to loosen the top two inches of soil for proper seedbed preparation. The chain shall be dragged across the top of the slope. The spikes on the chain shall produce puncture marks in the slope as well as serve to loosen the soil surface.

3. Where the sloped areas are smoothly graded and are unable to be loosened satisfactorily for seedbed preparation, cutting horizontal grooves into the slope may be required with the use of grading equipment or by other means.

4. If the slope is freshly graded and the surface is friable without disturbing, the Contractor may be allowed to seed the slope without further slope preparation.

B. Areas Flatter Than 3:1 and Playing Fields



1. Use a disk or harrow to loosen the top 4 inches of soil. Where this is not possible backdrag the area with the toothed bucket or dozer type equipment to loosen the soil surface.

2. Rake the area smooth and remove roots, rocks and other debris that may interfere with the seeding operation. Debris larger than two inches in diameter should be raked from the surface with the use of a York Rock Rake, hand rake or other comparable equipment.

3. In the final preparation of the surface, care should be taken to insure that low areas or depressions do not occur which could later cause ponding or settling out areas.

C. Ditchlines, Waterways, Channel Change Areas

1. Care should be taken to insure that a minimum of disturbance occurs in all areas that are to carry water through the site. Preparation for seeding in these areas consists of removing large stones, rocks, roots and other debris that may interfere with the germination of seed.

2. In ditchlines that will receive erosion control treatment, the ditch shall be free of all obstructions that may prevent the erosion control from being attached securely and to the bottom and sides of the ditch.

3.4 LIME APPLICATION

A. Lime shall be applied at the rate of 45 lb./1000 sq. ft.

B. Lime may be applied with the use of a bulk spreader, drop type spreader, Hydroseeder or any other equipment approved for application by the Engineer. The application shall result in an even spreading of the lime over the entire area to be seeded.

C. In areas 3:1 or flatter the lime shall be applied after the disking operation and before raking the soil. Lime shall be applied before any application of fertilizer except when the seeding equipment used is a hydroseeder. On slopes 3:1 or steeper or where a hydroseeder is used in the seeding operation, the application of lime can be made in connection with the fertilizer seed and mulch in the slurry mix in the hydroseeder.

3.5 FERTILIZER APPLICATION

A. The rate of application shall be the equivalent of 25 lbs./1000 sq ft. except where otherwise directed.

B. Fertilizer may be applied with the use of a bulk spreader, cyclone spreader, Hydroseeder or other equipment approved for application by the Engineer. The application shall result in an even spreading of the fertilizer over the entire area to be seeded.

C. The Contractor shall take care as to not spill large amounts of the fertilizer in the areas to be seeded during the loading and spreading of fertilizer.

D. The fertilizer shall be worked into the topsoil to a depth of 3 inches.

3.6 SEEDING

A. Prior to seeding, scarify the topsoil surface with a rake to a minimum depth of 1/4 inch. The application of seed shall be by broadcast, cyclone type, drill type, hydroseeder, or



other equipment approved for application by the Engineer. The application of the seed over the area shall be even and at the rates specified.

B. Sow Seed by Mechanical Seeder as Follows:

1. Mix seed thoroughly with clean dry sawdust and broadcast at rate of 200 lbs. of seed per acre for permanent seeding or as specified elsewhere for temporary seeding.

2. Apply mulch uniformly to depth of approximately 1-1/4 inches.

3. Anchor mulch by the following methods.a. Apply light tack coat of asphalt emulsion or synthetic mulch binder.b. On slopes steeper than 3 horizontal to 1 vertical, anchor with EC-2 (jute mesh)

matting fastened to wooden stakes.

C. Sow Seed by Hydraulic Seeder as Follows:1. Prepare homogeneous slurry equal to the seed mixture used for mechanic seeding

as specified in this Section.2. Distribute slurry uniformly at rate equal to the rate specified for mechanical seeding.3. Apply mulch as specified for sowing by mechanical seeder.

D. The Contractor shall take great care to insure that the seed is not sown into areas that are to receive landscaping or other treatment such as asphalt and or concrete pavement. This includes bed areas, landscaped berms, parking and drive areas as well as sidewalks, etc.

E. After sowing, seed shall be rolled with a cultipacker and immediately mulched with straw or wood cellulose fiber.

3.7 MULCHING

A. Straw mulch will be applied at the rate of 45 lbs./1000 sq. ft. Wood cellulose fiber mulch shall be applied at the rate of 35 lbs. dry weight/1000 sq. ft.

B. The application of straw mulch will be through a blower or other approved equipment capable of shredding the material from the bale and distributing it evenly over the seeded areas. The application of mulch will take place no more than 24 hours after the seeding operation of the area.

C. The application of wood cellulose fiber mulch shall be in a slurry mix through a hydroseeder. The slurry mixture shall be constantly agitated from the initial mixing point until the material is discharged onto the ground. The material shall then be applied over the seeded area in a manner not disruptive to the placement of seed.

D. The Contractor will take all necessary precautions to prevent the application of the wood cellulose fiber mulch, straw or binders onto landscaped areas, fixtures, fences and signs in the area to be mulched.

3.8 MULCH TACKIFIER

A. Straw mulch will be tacked to the seeded area by the use of one of the following methods. A crimping device may be used that will punch the straw into the soil to prevent wind disturbance. The use of a chemical binder manufactured for the purpose of securing mulch may also be used when applied with a hydroseeder. The use of wood cellulose is also allowed for tacking straw mulch.

B. When a chemical binder is used, follow the manufacturer's recommendations as to the rates of material required. The Contractor may also elect the use of an application of



wood cellulose fiber at the rate of 750 pounds to the acre as a tackifier in lieu of the above methods.

C. The tacking or securing of the straw mulch shall be completed immediately after the mulching is complete.

3.9 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF SEEDED AREAS

A. After the seeding is completed in a particular area, the area shall be protected from vehicular, and or foot traffic by erecting, barricades, signs, ropes or other such devices to prevent traffic where necessary.

B. Surfaces gullied or otherwise damaged following seeding shall be repaired and re-graded as required and re-seeded as directed by the Engineer.

C. The maintenance period will extend through the time necessary to establish a healthy, uniform, two (2) inch high close stand of grass, free of weeds, bare spots, and surface irregularities.

3.10 ACCEPTANCE OF SEEDED AREAS

A. The acceptance of seeded areas shall be at the end of the establishment period mentioned above. Final acceptance shall be made when the specified vegetation is successfully established in the area to be accepted.



December 12, 2016

PLANTS 329300 - 1

SECTION 329300 - PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plants.2. Planting soils.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

C. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

D. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

G. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

H. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.

I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

J. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

K. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.


December 12, 2016

PLANTS 329300 - 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils.

B. Samples of mineral mulch.

C. Product certificates.

D. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year.


A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

1. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

1. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling.2. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth.

a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.

b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.

C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Monroe Park Site, Checkers House.


A. Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.

B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.

C. Handle planting stock by root ball.

D. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F until planting.

E. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.


December 12, 2016

PLANTS 329300 - 3

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.

b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.

2. Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion:

a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months.b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months.c. Annuals: Three months.

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below.

1. Maintenance Period for Trees and Shrubs: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.2. Maintenance Period for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Six months from date of Substantial

Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

B. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.

C. Annuals: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed, with well-established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery.

2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows:


December 12, 2016

PLANTS 329300 - 4

1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 sieve.

B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve.

C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.

D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 sieve.

G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.

2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content

35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inchsieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

C. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.

D. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.

E. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.4 FERTILIZERS

A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 15 percent phosphoric acid.

B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft.of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.


December 12, 2016

PLANTS 329300 - 5

D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.

2.5 PLANTING SOILS

A. Planting Soil ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic material content. Verify suitability of soil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix soil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil:

1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4. 2. Ratio of Loose Peat to Topsoil by Volume: 2:3.

3. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft.4. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft.5. Weight of Bonemeal per 1000 Sq. Ft: 18 lbs.

6. Weight of Superphosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft.24 lbs.

2.6 MULCHES

A. Organic Mulch: Shredded hardwood.

2.7 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS

A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd.minimum.

2.8 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT

A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inchin any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening.

B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.


December 12, 2016

PLANTS 329300 - 6

3.2 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter.

2. Excavate at least 12 incheswider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock.

B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may not be used as planting soil.

3.3 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING

A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1.

B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.

C. Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inchabove adjacent finish grades.

1. Use planting soil for backfill.2. Balled and Burlapped: After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut

and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

3. Container-Grown: Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.4. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets.

When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

D. Bare-Root Stock: Set and support bare-root stock in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grade.

E. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.

3.4 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING

A. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Landscape Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character.

3.5 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING

A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated on drawings in even rows with triangular spacing.

B. Use planting soil for backfill.


December 12, 2016

PLANTS 329300 - 7

C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.

D. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water.

E. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

F. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock.

3.6 PLANTING AREA MULCHING

A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.

3.7 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.

B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.

D. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.



STORM DRAINAIGE 334100 - 1

SECTION 334100 - STORM DRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes gravity-flow, non-pressure storm drainage outside the building with the following components:

1. Piping.2. Cleanouts.3. Drainage Structures.4. Precast concrete manholes.5. Bioswales

1.2 DEFINITIONS


B. PE: Polyethylene plastic.C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.3 PERMITTING REQUIREMENTSA. All materials, installation and testing shall comply with City of Richmond requirements.

The Contractor shall review these specifications against the City of Richmond requirements at the time of construction and bring any conflicts immediately to the attention of the Engineer for resolution.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Drainage pipe and fittings.2. Couplings.3. PVC Drain Basins & Manholes.4. Manhole castings.5. Bioretention planting soil mix

B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers.2. Drain Basins. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames, covers, and

grates.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Bioretention planting soil mix gradation test results




A. Do not store plastic pipe and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

D. Handle drain basins structures according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.


A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's written permission.


A. Sub-contractor installing the porous paving system must have experience on at least 3 projects utilizing porous pavers.

B. Prior to work, arrange for a pre-installation meeting with the Engineer to review the stabilization of adjacent areas, means of protecting the work from sediment, and installation methods.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.

2.2 CONCRETE PIPEA. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76, Class III, Wall B, for gasketed

(o-ring) joints. Gaskets shall be ASTM C 443, rubber.


A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 12 and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.



2.4 MANHOLES

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. Manholes shall meet the requirements of VDOT MH-1.

1. Diameter: 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base

section, as required to prevent flotation.3. Base Section: 8-inch (200-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 5-inch (125-

mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having base section with integral floor.

4. Riser Sections: 5-inch (125m) minimum wall thickness, constructed in increments of 12 inches (300 mm), and of lengths to provide depth indicated.

5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.

6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber.7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole

walls, for each pipe connection.8. Steps: per VDOT standards. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to

finished grade is less than 48 inches (1220 mm).9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and

diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

10. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover.a. Manhole Frames and Covers: per VDOT standards

2.5 CLEANOUTS

A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside caulk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. Use units with top-loading classifications according to the following applications: Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: PVC Schedule 40 pipe and fittings.

2.6 PVC RAIN BASINS & MANHOLES

A. PVC Drain Basins: PVC surface drainage inlets shall include the drain basin type as indicated on the contract drawing and referenced within the contract specifications. The ductile iron grates (12” and 15” frames are cast iron) for each of these fittings are to be considered an integral part of the surface drainage inlet and shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. The surface drainage inlets shall be as manufactured by Nyloplast a division of Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc., or prior approved equal.

B. Materials: PVC pipe stock, utilizing a thermo-molding process to reform the pipe stock to the specified configuration. The drainage pipe connection stubs shall be manufactured from PVC pipe stock and formed to provide a watertight connection with the specified pipe system. This joint tightness shall conform to ASTM D3212 for joints for drain and sewer plastic pipe using flexible elastomeric seals. The pipe bell spigot shall be joined to the main body of the drain basin or catch basin. The pipe stock used to manufacture the



main body and pipe stubs of the surface drainage inlets shall meet the mechanical property requirements for fabricated fittings as described by ASTM D3034, Standard for Sewer PVC Pipe and Fittings; ASTM F1336, Standard for PVC Gasketed Sewer Fittings.

C. The grates furnished for all surface drainage inlets shall be ductile iron grates for sizes 8”, 10”, 12”, 15”, 18”, 24” and 30” (12” and 15” frames are cast iron) shall be made specifically for each basin so as to provide a round bottom flange that closely matches the diameter of the surface drainage inlet. Grates for drain basins shall be capable of supporting H-25 wheel loading for heavy-duty traffic or H-10 loading for pedestrian traffic. 12” and 15” grates will be hinged to the frame using pins. Metal used in the manufacture of the castings shall conform to ASTM A536 grade 70-50-05 for ductile iron and ASTM A-48-83 class 30B for 12” and 15” cast iron frames. Grates shall be provided painted black.

2.7 TRENCH DRAINS

A. Trench drains shall meet one of the following as indicated on the drawings:

1. Trench drains at park entrances shall be factory supplied frames and grates for installation on field constructed concrete trenches. See drawing detail for additional information.

B. All other trench drains shall be ACO Drain K100S/KS100S complete with gratings secured with ‘QuickLok’ locking as manufactured by ACO Polymer Products, Inc. or approved equal. The trench system bodies shall be manufactured from polyester polymer concrete with minimum properties as follows:

Compressive strength: 14,000 psiFlexural strength: 4,000 psiWater absorption 0.07%

2.7 BIOSWALES

A. Bioretention Planting Soil: Bioretention Planting Soil for field constructed bioswales shall be a mixture of 50% sand, 30% leaf compost (fully composted, NOT partially rotted leaves), and 20% topsoil. Topsoil shall be sandy loam of loamy sand of uniform composition, containing no more than 5% clay, free of stones, stumps, roots, or similar objects greater than one inch, brush, or any other material which may be harmful to plant growth, or a hindrance to plant growth or maintenance.

B. The topsoil shall be free of plants or plant parts of Bermuda grass, Quack grass, Johnson grass, Mugwort, Nutsedge, Poison Ivy, Canadian Thistle or others as specified. It shall not contain toxic substances harmful to plant growth.

C. Sand shall meet the requirements of ASTM C-33 Concrete Sand.

D. The contractor shall provide gradation testing results demonstrating that the bioretention planting soil mix meets the following requirements (percent by weight):

1. 2.0 – 0.050 mm 50% - 85% (AASHTO T88)

2. 0.050 – 0.002 mm 0% - 50% (AASHTO T88)

3. less than 0.002 mm 10% - 20% (AASHTO T88)

4. organic matter 1.5% - 10% (AASHTO T194)



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork."


A. Gravity-Flow, Non-pressure Storm Sewer Piping: Use the following pipe materials for each size range:

1. NPS 12 and smaller: PVC SDR 35 sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.

2. NPS 15 and larger: Concrete, ASTM C76 Class III reinforced, o-ring gasketed joints.

B. Bioretention Swale Underdrain Piping: Use the following pipe materials for each size range:

1. NPS 6 and smaller: Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both.

F. Install gravity-flow, non-pressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install PE corrugated sewer piping according to CPPA's "Recommended Installation Practices for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings."

2. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.3. Install concrete Concrete Pipe and Fittings according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe

Installation Manual." Lay pipe with bell and spigot joints with the bells upstream.



3.4 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections according to ASTM C 891.

C. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 1 inch (25 mm) above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 PVC DRAIN BASINS & MANHOLESA. The specified PVC surface drainage inlet shall be installed using conventional flexible

pipe backfill materials and procedures. The backfill material shall be crushed stone or other granular material meeting the requirements of class 1 or 2 material as defined in ASTM D2321. The surface drainage inlets shall be bedded and back-filled uniformly in accordance with ASTM D2321. The drain basin body will be cut at the time of the final grade so as to maintain a one piece, leak proof structure. No brick, stone or concrete block will be used to set the grate to the final grade height.

B. Concrete collars to support the lid or grate are not required.

3.7 TRENCH DRAINSA. Install according to manufacturer’s written instruction and the project drawings.

3.8 BIORETENTION SWALES

A. Sediment from adjacent areas can clog the bioretention swale and underlying soils. Do not excavate to subgrade or install any part of the bioretention system until the adjacent site is stabilized with vegetation. Failure to protect the bioretetntion and underlying soils from sediment will result in the Contractor removing and replacing sections of the bioretention swale.

B. The bottom of the excavation shall not be compacted and the sides shall not be smoothed.

C. The planting soil shall not be compacted, but placed in loose lifts and settled by soaking it, either with rainfall or a hose. After settling, additional planting soil should be added to meet the specified elevation. The elevation tolerance is tighter than it would be for a planting bed as the bioretention basin is an engineered stormwater treatment device.

C. Prior to planting soil placement, the contributing drainage area shall be fully stabilized. If this is not possible, provide double sit fence installed to prevent sediment laden water from entering the planting soil.

3.7 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed.

B. Backfill to grade according to Division 31 Section "Earthwork."



3.10 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures.

1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (610 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.

b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.

c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction.3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24

hours' advance notice.4. Submit separate report for each test.

5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:a. Exception: Piping with silttight joints unless required by authorities having

jurisdiction.b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417.

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.12 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials.
